Sony 6220501-BV Transmitter module for mobile applications User Manual GM47 Integrators Manual

Sony Mobile Communications Inc Transmitter module for mobile applications GM47 Integrators Manual

Exhibit 8 Integrators Manual

Product Photo/IllustrationGM47/GM48
The product described in this manual conforms to the TTE directive 91/263/EEC andEMC directive 89/336/EEC. The product fulfils the requirements according toETS 300 342-1.SAR statement: This product is intended to be used with the antenna or otherradiating element at least 20cm away from any part of the human body.The information contained in this document is the proprietary information ofSony Ericsson Mobile Communications International. The contents areconfidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers, employees, agentsor subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document, without the prior writtenconsent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, is strictlyprohibited. Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in aretrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic ormechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written consentof Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, the copyright holder.First edition (April 2002)Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manualwithout making any warranty as to the content contained herein. FurtherSony Ericsson Mobile Communications International reserves the right to makemodifications, additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors,inaccurate information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment at any timeand without notice. Such changes will, nevertheless be incorporated into new editionsof this manual.All rights reserved.©Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, 2002Publication number: LZT 123 7263 R1APrinted in UKTrademarksAIX is a trademark owned by International Business Machines Corporation.
3LZT 123 7263 R1AContentsPart 1: Overview................................................................................................. 111. Introduction............................................................................................................131.1 Target Users ......................................................................................... 131.2 Prerequisites ......................................................................................... 131.3 Manual Structure ......................................................................................... 132. GM47/GM48 Modules ...........................................................................................152.1 About the GM47/GM48 Family .................................................................. 152.2 GM47 in a Communication System............................................................. 152.3 Features ......................................................................................... 172.3.1 Types of Mobile Station .................................................................. 172.3.2 Short Message Service .................................................................... 182.3.3 Voice Calls...................................................................................... 182.3.4 Data.................................................................................................182.3.5 SIM Card.........................................................................................192.3.6 Average Power Consumption .........................................................192.3.7 Other Features ................................................................................ 192.4 Service and Support ..................................................................................... 192.4.1 Web Pages....................................................................................... 192.4.2 Integrator’s Manual........................................................................ 192.4.3 Developer’s Kit ............................................................................... 202.5 Precautions ......................................................................................... 203. Abbreviations .........................................................................................................21Part 2: Developer’s Kit....................................................................................... 231. Introduction............................................................................................................251.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 251.2 Contents of the Kit ....................................................................................... 251.3 General Functioning of the Kit .................................................................... 262. Using the Developer’s Kit......................................................................................292.1 Start up Check List....................................................................................... 302.2 Developer’s Board Overlay.......................................................................... 312.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors.............................................................. 322.4 System Connector Pin Assignments ............................................................ 36Part 3: Integrating the Module............................................................................ 371. Mechanical Description.........................................................................................391.1 Interface Description.................................................................................... 391.2 Physical Dimensions .................................................................................... 40
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL4LZT 123 7263 R1A2. System Connector Interface ..................................................................................412.1 Overview .......................................................................................... 412.2 General Electrical and Logical Characteristics ............................................ 442.2.1 General Protection Requirements...................................................442.3 Grounds .......................................................................................... 452.3.1 Analogue Ground - AGND ..............................................................452.3.2 Digital Ground - DGND..................................................................452.4 VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input ......................................................... 452.5 ON/OFF and External Power Signal ............................................................ 462.5.1 Switching the module ON and OFF ................................................462.5.2 VIO - 2.75V Supply..........................................................................472.6 Analogue Audio .......................................................................................... 482.6.1 Audio To Mobile Station - ATMS ....................................................482.6.2 Audio From Mobile Station - AFMS ...............................................492.6.3 Microphone Signals.........................................................................502.6.4 Speaker Signals ...............................................................................512.7 Digital Audio .......................................................................................... 522.8 Serial Data Interfaces.................................................................................... 532.8.1 UART1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RI..............532.8.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD..........................................................542.8.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI ...................................542.8.4 UART2 - TD2, RD2 .........................................................................562.8.5 UART3 - TD3, RD3 .........................................................................572.9 SIM Card Related Signals ............................................................................ 572.9.1 SIM Detection - SIMPRESENCE ....................................................582.10 Service/Programming ................................................................................... 592.11 Buzzer .......................................................................................... 592.12 LED .......................................................................................... 592.13 General Purpose Digital I/O Ports................................................................ 602.14 General Purpose Analogue I/O Ports............................................................ 612.14.1 Digital to Analogue Converter - DAC.............................................612.14.2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1, 2 and 3 - ADCx ........................622.15 External I 2C Serial Control Bus .................................................................. 632.16 TX_ON - Burst Transmission....................................................................... 632.17 Real Time Clock .......................................................................................... 643. Antenna Connector ................................................................................................654. Hints for Integrating the Module..........................................................................674.1 Safety Advice and Precautions..................................................................... 674.1.1 General............................................................................................674.1.2 SIM Card .........................................................................................674.1.3 Antenna............................................................................................684.2 Installation of the Module............................................................................. 684.2.1 Where to Install the Module ............................................................684.2.2 How to Install the Module...............................................................694.3 Antenna .......................................................................................... 704.3.1 General............................................................................................70
5LZT 123 7263 R1A4.3.2 Antenna Type .................................................................................. 714.3.3 Antenna Placement .........................................................................714.3.4 The Antenna Cable.......................................................................... 714.3.5 Possible Communication Disturbances ..........................................725. Technical Data........................................................................................................ 73Part 4: Using AT Commands.............................................................................. 751. Introduction to AT Commands ............................................................................771.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 771.2 Syntax Description....................................................................................... 771.2.1 Conventions.....................................................................................771.2.2 AT Command Syntax....................................................................... 781.2.3 AT Response Syntax ........................................................................ 791.3 Error Codes ......................................................................................... 811.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)...........................811.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code) ................ 821.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands ............................................ 832. Call Control ............................................................................................................ 852.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control...................................................................... 852.2 ATA Answer Incoming Call..................................................... 852.3 ATD Dial .................................................................................. 862.4 ATH Hang up............................................................................ 882.5 ATL Monitor Speaker Loudness.............................................. 882.6 ATO Return to Online Data Mode............................................ 892.7 ATP Select Pulse Dialling........................................................ 892.8 ATT Select Tone Dialling ........................................................ 892.9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control ................................... 902.10 AT+CHUP Hang up Call.................................................................... 902.11 AT+CMOD Call Mode ........................................................................ 912.12 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up................................................................ 922.13 AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation ........................................... 923. Control and Status .................................................................................................953.1 ATQ Result Code Suppression................................................. 953.2 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control.............................................. 953.3 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character............................................. 963.4 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character........................... 963.5 ATS4 Response Formatting Character....................................... 973.6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)........ 983.7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control................................................. 983.8 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout .................................... 993.9 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control.............................. 993.10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control............................ 1003.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring............................................... 100
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL6LZT 123 7263 R1A3.12 AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time ..................................... 1023.13 AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset .................................................... 1033.14 AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event ......................................................... 1033.15 AT*ESMM Ericsson Settings Minute Minder................................... 1043.16 AT+CALA Set Alarm ....................................................................... 1043.17 AT+CALD Alarm Delete .................................................................. 1053.18 AT+CAPD Postpone or Dismiss an Alarm....................................... 1053.19 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date......................................................... 1063.20 AT+CEER Extended Error Report ................................................... 1063.21 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality ................................................. 1073.22 AT+CIND Indicator Control ............................................................ 1083.23 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands.................................... 1093.24 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error ................................................ 1093.25 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting .............................. 1103.26 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status..................................................... 1113.27 AT+CPIN PIN Control .................................................................... 1133.28 AT+CPWD Change Password ........................................................... 1153.29 AT+CR Service Reporting Control.............................................. 1173.30 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code ...................................................... 1173.31 AT+CSAS Save Settings .................................................................. 1183.32 AT+CSQ Signal Strength ............................................................... 1183.33 AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update........................................ 1194. Audio......................................................................................................................1214.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification................... 1214.2 AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation ................................. 1274.3 AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request......................................... 1294.4 AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection..................................... 1304.5 AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal ........................................... 1324.6 AT*E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable....................... 1334.7 AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode........................................... 1334.8 AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode ........................................... 1344.9 AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request ...................... 1344.10 AT*EPRR Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read................................ 1364.11 AT*EPRW Ericsson Personal Ringtype Write ................................. 1374.12 AT*ERIL Ericsson Ring Level Set ................................................. 1394.13 AT*ERIN Ericsson Ring Set ........................................................... 1404.14 AT*ERIP Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command..................... 1414.15 AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound ................................ 1424.16 AT*ESOM Ericsson Settings Own Melody...................................... 1424.17 AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control ........................ 1444.18 ATM Monitor Speaker Control................................................ 1455. Data - CSD/HSCSD ..............................................................................................1475.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type ............................................ 1475.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol ....................................................... 1496. Data - GPRS..........................................................................................................151
7LZT 123 7263 R1A6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate ............................. 1516.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach................................................. 1526.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State ............................................................. 1536.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context ...................................................... 1546.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting .................................................. 1566.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address........................................................ 1576.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) ....... 1586.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested).......................... 1606.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status ............................... 1636.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages.......................... 1647. Data - HSCSD.......................................................................................................1657.1 AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters................................... 1657.2 AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters ........................................... 1667.3 AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration ............... 1677.4 AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report............................................ 1697.5 AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading................ 1708. Data - WAP...........................................................................................................1718.1 AT*EWBA Ericsson WAP Bookmark Add...................................... 1718.2 AT*EWBR Ericsson WAP Bookmark Read..................................... 1728.3 AT*EWCG Ericsson WAP CSD Gateway........................................ 1738.4 AT*EWCT Ericsson WAP Connection Timeout.............................. 1748.5 AT*EWDT Ericsson WAP Download Timeout ............................... 1748.6 AT*EWHP Ericsson WAP Homepage ............................................. 1758.7 AT*EWIL Ericsson WAP Image Load ........................................... 1758.8 AT*EWLI Ericsson WAP Login ..................................................... 1768.9 AT*EWPA Ericsson WAP Push Access Setting .............................. 1778.10 AT*EWPB Ericsson WAP Preferred Bearer .................................... 1778.11 AT*EWPN Ericsson WAP Profile Name ......................................... 1788.12 AT*EWPR Ericsson WAP Profile.................................................... 1799. GPS Interoperability ........................................................................................... 1819.1 AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2 ................................... 1819.2 AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate.................. 18210. Internet.................................................................................................................. 18510.1 AT*ENAD Ericsson Internet Account Define.................................. 18511. Identification ........................................................................................................ 18911.1 AT Attention Command....................................................... 18911.2 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration............................ 18911.3 AT&W Store User Profile .......................................................... 19011.4 AT* List all Supported AT Commands ................................. 19011.5 AT*ESIR Read MS System Interface Release............................... 19011.6 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification........................... 19111.7 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification ...................................... 19111.8 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification................................... 192
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL8LZT 123 7263 R1A11.9 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification ............ 19211.10 AT+GMI Read Manufacturer Identification .................................. 19311.11 AT+GMM Read Model Identification.............................................. 19311.12 AT+GMR Read Revision Identification.......................................... 19411.13 ATI Identification Information .............................................. 19412. Input/Output.........................................................................................................19512.1 AT*E2IO Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write....................... 19513. Interface ................................................................................................................19713.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control .................................................................... 19713.2 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control ............................................ 19713.3 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response.......................................... 19713.4 AT+WS46 Mode Selection............................................................... 19813.5 ATE Command Echo.............................................................. 19813.6 ATV DCE Response Format................................................... 19913.7 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration ...................................... 20013.8 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol ............................... 20113.9 AT+CRES Restore Settings.............................................................. 20313.10 AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format .................................. 20413.11 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control ...................................... 20513.12 AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting............................ 20513.13 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command...................................... 20613.14 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time.............................. 20714. Network .................................................................................................................20914.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description..................................... 20914.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode.............. 21114.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication.................................. 21714.4 AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status......................................... 21714.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile................................. 21814.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network.......................... 21914.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network......................... 22014.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number ............................... 22114.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name ................................................. 22214.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification ................................................ 22314.11 AT+CLCK Facility Lock .................................................................. 22314.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number......................................................... 22514.13 AT+COPS Operator Selection.......................................................... 22714.14 AT+CREG Network Registration ..................................................... 22815. Phonebook.............................................................................................................22915.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum ......................... 22915.2 AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group................................................... 22915.3 AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group ................................................... 23015.4 AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number .................................. 23115.5 AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group ................................................... 23315.6 AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item ........................................... 233
9LZT 123 7263 R1A15.7 AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read..................................................... 23415.8 AT*ESIL Ericsson Silence Command ........................................... 23415.9 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number.............................................. 23515.10 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find............................................................. 23615.11 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read ............................................................ 23615.12 AT+CPBS Phone Storage ................................................................ 23815.13 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write ........................................................... 23916. Short Message Services - Point to Point............................................................. 24116.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control.................................................................... 24116.2 AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound................................ 24116.3 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages.......................... 24116.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address.................................................. 24116.5 AT+CMGF Message Format............................................................. 24216.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory ............................................ 24316.7 AT+CMGS Send Message ................................................................ 24516.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage ........................................................ 24816.9 AT+CMGC Send Command.............................................................. 24916.10 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage ............................................ 25216.11 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE.................................... 25316.12 AT+CMGR Read Message ................................................................ 25716.13 AT+CMGL List Message .................................................................. 26316.14 AT+CMGD Delete Message.............................................................. 26616.15 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters......................................... 26716.16 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters............................................. 26716.17 AT+CSCS Select Character Set....................................................... 26816.18 AT*ESTL Ericsson SMS Template List Edit.................................. 26916.19 AT+CSMS Select Message Service.................................................. 27017. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast........................................................... 27317.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE.................................... 27317.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type............................. 27318. SIM Application Toolkit...................................................................................... 27518.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control.................................................................... 27518.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings.................................. 27518.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text................................................ 27618.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey..................................................... 27718.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input ..................................................... 27818.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item................................................... 28018.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu ............................................... 28118.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)......................... 28318.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call.................................................. 28319. Supplementary Services ...................................................................................... 28519.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control.................................................................... 28519.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter................................................ 28519.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum.............................. 286
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL10 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge ........................................................... 28719.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table ................................ 28819.6 AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function................................................ 28919.7 AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set ................................................ 29019.8 AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set............................................................ 29119.9 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions....................... 29119.10 AT+CCWA Call Waiting ................................................................... 29419.11 AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty ............................................... 29619.12 AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification ............................................. 29719.13 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction........................... 29919.14 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification .............................. 30019.15 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data .................... 30220. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands..............................................................305
Product Photo/IllustrationPart 1: Overview
13LZT 123 7263 R1A1. Introduction1.1 Target UsersGM47 and GM48 modules are designed to be integrated into machine-to-machine or man-to-machine communications applications. They areintended to be used by to manufacturers, system integrators,applications developers and developers of wireless communicationsequipment.1.2 PrerequisitesIt is assumed that the person integrating the GM47 or GM48 into anapplication has a basic understanding of the following:• GSM networking;• Wireless communication and antennas (aerials);• AT commands;• ITU-T standard V.24/V.28;• Micro controllers and programming;• Electronic hardware design.1.3 Manual StructureThe manual is composed of four parts:Part 1- OverviewThis section provides a broad overview of the GM47/GM48 family andincludes a list of abbreviations used in the manual.Part 2 - Developer’s KitThis section lists the contents of the whole development kit andprovides the information to setup and use the equipment.Part 3 - Integrating the ModuleThis section describes each of the signals available on the GM47/GM48modules, along with mechanical information. The section also providesyou with design guidelines and explains what is needed tocommercialise an application from a regulatory point of view.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL14 LZT 123 7263 R1APart 4 - Using AT CommandsThis section lists all the AT Commands relevant to the GM47 andGM48, including their required parameters. The purpose of part 4 is togive you detailed information on the function of the AT Command set.
GM47/GM48 MODULES15LZT 123 7263 R1A2. GM47/GM48 Modules2.1 About the GM47/GM48 FamilyTwo modules make up the family; GM47 and GM48, for use in the900/1800MHz and 850/1900MHz GSM bands respectively.Note! As the characteristics of the modules are quite similar, this manual onlyrefers to the GM48 where a difference exists; by default all otherreferences are to the GM47.The products belong to a new generation of Sony Ericsson modules, andare intended to be used in machine-to-machine applications and man-to-machine applications. They are used when there is a need to send andreceive data (by SMS, CSD, HSCSD, or GPRS), and make voice callsover the GSM network.GM47 modules are not “stand alone” devices; they are used as theengine in an application created by the customer. A typical application,involves a micro-controller and GM47 module, in which the micro-controller sends AT commands to the module via an RS232communications link.2.2GM47inaCommunicationSystemFigure 2.1 illustrates the main blocks of a wireless communicationsystem using the GM47. It also shows the communication principles ofthe system. The definitions in the figure, as used elsewhere in thismanual, are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07.07.• The MS (mobile station) represents the GM47 module plus SIMcard. The module excluding SIM card, is known as the ME (mobileequipment).• The TE (terminal equipment) is a micro-controller (i.e., a computer)and is a part of the application.Figure 2.1 Main Blocks in a Wireless SystemTE(DTE) AT commands to control MSME status, responsesMS(GM47)GSM NetworkApplicationWireless Communication System
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL16 LZT 123 7263 R1AIn accordance with the recommendations of ITU-T (InternationalTelecommunication Union - Telecommunications StandardisationSector) V.24, the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface.The functions of the GM47 follow the recommendations provided byETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) and ITU-T.ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM elementof the module; these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericssonspecific commands.To find out how to work with AT commands, see “Part 4: Using ATCommands”, page 75.Figure 2.2 illustrates the interface between the module and theapplication. The entire System Connector Interface is described indetail in “System Connector Interface”, page 41.Figure 2.2 The Interface between the Module and the ApplicationNote! ITU-T standards define TE and TA as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)and DCE (Data Circuit Terminating Equipment) respectively.Signalsand power60 pinsystem connectorTE(Application)MS(GM47)Antennaconnector
GM47/GM48 MODULES17LZT 123 7263 R1A2.3 FeaturesThe module performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSMstandard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The functions of the module areimplemented by issuing AT commands over a serial interface.2.3.1 Types of Mobile StationGM47 and GM48 are dual band mobile stations with the characteristicsshown in the tables below.GM47 GSM900 E-GSM900 GSM1800Frequency Range (MHz) TX: 890-915RX: 935-960 TX: 880-890RX: 925-935 TX: 1710-1785RX: 1805-1880Channel spacing 200kHz 200kHzNumber of channels 173carriers*8(TDMA)GSM: channels 1 to 124E-GSM: channels 975 to 1023374carriers*8(TDMA)DCS: channels 512 to 885Modulation GMSK GMSKTX phase accuracy <5ºRMSphaseerror(burst) < 5º RMS phase error (burst)Duplex spacing 45MHz 95MHzReceiver sensitivity atantenna connector <–102dBm <–102dBmTransmitter output powerat antenna connector Class 42W(33dBm) Class 11W(30dBm)Automatic hand-over between GSM900 and GSM1800GM48 GSM850 GSM1900Frequency Range (MHz) TX: 824-849RX: 869-894 TX: 1850-1910RX: 1930-1990Channel spacing 200kHz 200kHzNumber of channels 123carriers*8(TDMA)GSM: channels 128 to 251 298carriers*8(TDMA)PCS: channels 512 to 810Modulation GMSK GMSKTX Phase Accuracy <5ºRMSphaseerror(burst) < 5º RMS phase error (burst)Duplex spacing 45MHz 80MHzReceiver sensitivity atantenna connector <–102dBm <–102dBmTransmitter output powerat antenna connector Class 50.8W (29dBm) Class 11W(30dBm)Automatic hand-over between GSM850 and GSM1900
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL18 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.3.2 Short Message ServiceThe module supports the following SMS services:• Sending; MO (mobile-originated) with both PDU (protocol dataunit) and text mode supported.• Receiving; MT (mobile-terminated) with both PDU and text modesupported.• CBM (cell broadcast message); a service in which a message is sentto all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the GSMnetwork (for example, traffic reports).• SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40.• SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40.The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using7-bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 bytes. Themodule supports up to 6 concatenated messages to extend this function.2.3.3 Voice CallsThe GM47 offers the capability of mobile originated and mobileterminated voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls.Multi-party, call waiting and call deflection features are available.Some of these features are network-operator specific.For the inter-connection of audio, the module offers both single endedand balanced analogue input and output lines. Direct interface to thedigital PCM (pulse code modulation) bus used within the module isavailable, thus by-passing the internal analogue circuitry. The GM47has an embedded echo cancellation and noise suppression for improvedaudio quality.2.3.4 DataThe module supports the following data protocols:• GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)Modules are Class B terminals, which provide simultaneousactivation and attachment of GPRS and GSM services. GM47modules are GPRS 4+1 enabled devices, which are capable oftransmitting in one timeslot per frame (up link), and receiving at amaximum of four timeslots per frame (down link).• CSD (Circuit Switched Data)GM47 modules are capable of establishing a CSD communication at9.6kbps.• HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data).GM47 supports HSCSD communication, with one timeslot perframe capacity in the up link and two timeslots per frame capacity inthe down link (2+1).
GM47/GM48 MODULES19LZT 123 7263 R1A2.3.5 SIM CardAn external SIM card with 3V or 5V technology, can be connected tothe module via its 60-pin system connector.2.3.6 Average Power ConsumptionNote! The power consumption during transmission is measured at maximumtransmitted power.2.3.7 Other FeaturesThese include:• Internet-ready module.• 07.10 multiplexing.• GPS interoperability.• SIM application tool kit.2.4 Service and Support2.4.1 Web PagesVisit our web site for the following information:• where to buy modules or for recommendations concerningaccessories and components;• the telephone number for customer support in your region;• FAQs (frequently asked questions).The web site address is:http://www.sonyericsson.com/M2M2.4.2 Integrator’s ManualThis manual provides you with all of the information you need tointegrate the module into your application.Idle Mode Transmit/OperationGSM850 and GSM900 Voice/CSD <5mA <250mA (<2Apeak)Data (GPRS 4+1) <5mA <350mA (<2A peak)GSM1800 and GSM1900 Voice/CSD <5mA <250mA (<1.75A peak)Data (GPRS 4+1) <5mA <350mA (<1.75A peak)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL20 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.4.3 Developer’s KitSony Ericsson provides the opportunity for designers to test the moduleon a limited scale using it’s Development Kit. The kit includes thenecessary accessories (software and hardware) required to build and testan application. It includes the following:• GSM module, GM47 or GM48;• This integrator’s manual;• Software developer’s kit and manual;• Developer’s kit hardware.All the user needs to provide, is a computer or micro-controller and theexpertise to use AT commands.2.5 PrecautionsGM47 and GM48 modules are static sensitive devices (SSDs). NormalSSD procedures for electronic devices should be used when handlingthe modules. In “Part 3: Integrating the Module”, page 37 you will findmore information about safety and product care. Do not exceed theenvironmental and electrical limits as specified in “Technical Data”,page 73.
ABBREVIATIONS21LZT 123 7263 R1A3. AbbreviationsAbbreviation ExplanationsBT BluetoothCBM Cell Broadcast MessageCBS Cell Broadcast ServiceCSD Circuit Switched DataDCE Data Circuit Terminating EquipmentDTE Data Terminal EquipmentDTMF Dual Tone Multi FrequencyEFR Enhanced Full RateEMC Electro-Magnetic CompatibilityETSI European Telecommunication Standards InstituteFR Full RateGPRS General Packet Radio ServiceGPS Global Positioning SystemGSM Global System for Mobile CommunicationHR Half RateHSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched DataITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationsStandardisation SectorME Mobile EquipmentMO Mobile OriginatedMS Mobile StationMT Mobile TerminatedPCM PulseCodeModulationPDU Protocol Data UnitRLP Radio Link ProtocolRF Radio FrequencyRTC Real Time ClockSDP Service Discovery ProtocolSIM Subscriber Identity ModuleSMS Short Message Service
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL22 LZT 123 7263 R1ATA Terminal AdapterTE Terminal EquipmentTHD Third Harmonic DistortionTS Telecom ServicesAbbreviation Explanations
Product Photo/IllustrationPart 2: Developer’s Kit
25LZT 123 7263 R1A1. Introduction1.1 OverviewThe developer’s kit is designed to get you started quickly. It contains allthe hardware you will need to begin the development of an application.The only items you need to provide are; a computer or micro controller,a SIM card and network subscription, and a knowledge of programmingwith AT commands.Note! Before connecting up and using the developer’s kit, we stronglyrecommend you read “Part 3: Integrating the Module”, page 37 and allof this section. There are many switches, jumpers and connector optionsin the developer’s kit. A knowledge of the functionality of the GM47module is therefore essential before you start altering the hardwaresettings.The main hardware in the developer’s kit is a screened box, containinga board onto which you plug the GM47 module. Connectors, switches,jumpers and SIM card holder are provided to allow you to configure andaccess all the functions of the module.1.2 Contents of the KitPlease take the time to check the contents of your kit against the listshown below. If any of the items are missing contact your supplierimmediately.Developer’s kit - Part Number DPY 102 218Contents:Description Product Number QtyRadio modem:GM47 module orGM48 module DPY 102 201DPY 102 2041GM47/GM48 developer’s kit (screenedbox and development board) KRY 101 1907 1Switched mode PSU 12V d.c. EPA-121DA-12 1UK mains plug EN90POWERLEADUK 1European mains plug EN90POWERLEADEU 1
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL26 LZT 123 7263 R1A1.3 General Functioning of the KitThe following block diagrams are provided to help you understand thegeneral principles of operation of the developer’s kit.You have the following options as shown in Figure 1.1:• Connect the GM47 internally, direct to J4 or position it externallyand connect to J10 via a flat cable.• Use the kit’s connectors to access and control the GM47 (allswitches and jumpers in their default positions).• Access and control the GM47 directly via J12 and a flat cable. Thisallows you to selectively bypass any circuits contained on the board,and test your own application.Figure 1.1 Module connections to the developer’s boardFigure 1.2 shows the various on-board voltages and how they are fed tothe GM47 and other circuitry. The developer’s board is powered by anexternal power supply connected to Vcc.Cable with connector/cable serial 9-9 PIN DB9(M)-DB9(F) 1Portable handsfree 2002-1-24 1Quad band antenna RG174 1Data carrier/CD-ROM containing:Software Manual;Integrator’s ManualLZY 213 1319 1Description Product Number QtyExternalApplicationJ4J10J11J12Developer'sboard circuitsand portsUser selectablejumpersPin headers60 pins female1.27mm pitchPin header60 pins male2.54mm pitchPin header60 pins male1.27mm pitchGM47Developer's boardfit direct to J4alternate flat cable to J10Pins connected in parallel
INTRODUCTION27LZT 123 7263 R1AFigure 1.2 Power supply connection and the on-board voltagesFigure 1.3, Figure 1.4 and Figure 1.5 show how various signals arerouted on the developer’s board. Thicker lines indicate multiple signals.Figure 1.3 Miscellaneous signals, connection and routingGM47VccDC Power Socket,Input 10..15V5Vreg.2V7reg.5V to developmentboard circuitsTo developmentboard & interfacecircuitsVIOVCCVIO presentLED+-TP4 TP53V8Switchedwhen VIOpresent3V8reg.2V712vJ12GM47STATUS LED(Blinks whenconnected to network)ON/OFFSelectableJumpersn/cJ5U10 SIMSIM holder withSIM presenceswitch (to DGND)0.22FSIMVRTCI²CSERVICEON/OFFLEDGeneral purpose I/OVIOSW42V7SERVICE LED(Lit when SW4 closed)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL28 LZT 123 7263 R1AFigure 1.4 Audio signals, connection and routingFigure 1.5 Comms signals, connection and routingJ12GM47EARMICHandsetBuzzerPCM3.5mm socket3.5mm socketRJ11 connector8 pin Mini-DINSelectableJumpersATMSAFMSMICN, MICP, BEARN, BEARPBuzzerPCM(Audio out)(Audio in)J12GM47UART1 (EDB)UART2 (ACB)UART3SelectablejumpersTD, RD, DTR, DCD,RTS, CTS, RITD2, RD2 & SERVICETD3 & RD3Level shifters
USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT29LZT 123 7263 R1A2. Using the Developer’s KitThis section provides you with the information needed to setup and usethe developer’s kit. Before changing switch and jumper settings, referto “2.3 Jumpers, Switches and Connectors”, page 32.Front and rear views of the developer’s kit are shown below. To accessthe inside, remove the 8 screws on the top of the box and the cover plate.Figure 2.1 Front viewFigure 2.2 Rear viewGM47/GM48 Developer's KitHANDSETDCIOVcc12vPCMMIC EARNCOFFON+5VOFFAPPSERVICESTATUSVIOON/OFFUART3 UART1 UART2RF
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL30 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.1 Start up Check ListTo use the developer’s kit in standard format check the following:• With the case lid removed, make sure the GM47 module is pluggedinto J4 and the RF lead is connected to the rear of the module;• Add your SIM card;• Check the jumpers are in their default positions. Refer to Figure 2.3;• Connect the serial cable between your computer and UART1 on therear panel;• Connect the antenna to the RF connector on the rear panel;• Connect the audio equipment if required;• Plug the external power supply into the socket marked 12v on thefront panel;• Switch Vcc to ON;• Push ON/OFF for at least 2 seconds until the yellow VIO LED is on.Your developer’s kitshould now be operational and ready to receive ATcommands.
USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT31LZT 123 7263 R1A2.2 Developer’s Board OverlayFigure 2.3 shows the developer’s board, including the position of all theconnectors, switches and jumpers (default positions). You will noticethat many jumpers are labelled “SW”. This is because the board waspreviously fitted with DIL switches.Figure 2.3 Developer’s board overlayUART2(ACB)UART1(EDB)UART3J517U10SIMHolderTP5 TP4VCCJ415960 2System ConnectorJ1026059 1System Connector (for flat cable)J11215960Test ConnectorSW8SW11SW7SW10SW1SW9SW6SW3SW5J1226059 1Application ConnectorJP24JP21JP1812vDC PowerSocket,Input10..15V d.c.VccNC/OFF/ONpower tomoduleON/OFF(module)Handset PCM MICAudio in(ATMS)EARAudio out(AFMS)SERVICESTATUSVIOSIM testconnectorSW4DCIOMaintain inOFF position(Not used with this module.Only present for backwardcompatibility)RF connectorGround stud
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL32 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.3 Jumpers, Switches and ConnectorsYou will notice that many jumpers are labelled “SW”. This is becausethe board was previously fitted with DIL switches. All jumpers arelocated on the developer’s board (see “Developer’s board overlay”,page 31).Jumper Signal SettingJP18 TD Maintain jumper inlower default positionJP21 RD Maintain jumper inlower default positionJP24 Reserved forfuture use MUST remain open to preventdamage to the module. As an extraprecaution, maintain DCIO in the OFFpositionSW4 SERVICE Connect the pins using the floatingconnector ONLY when programmingthe module or logging dataSW1, SW3, SW5,SW6, SW7, SW8,SW9, SW10,SW11, J11 linksSee diagrambelow Default positions shown below. Moveany “SW” jumper to the right-handposition to divert the signal toconnector J12. Remove the J11 linksto bypass J8, J9 or CP1 and processaudio signals externallyJP21 JP18SIMRSTSIMCLKSCLSDASW8 SW1ON/OFFPRESENCESIMVCCSIMDATSW9BUZZERLEDRIDCDVRTCRD3 (RX3)TD3 (TX3)SW11 SW6DTRCTSRTSRD (DFMS)PCMULDPCMINPCMOUTPCMCLKSW7 SW3TD (DTMS)RD2 (CFMS)TD2 (CTMS)PCMDLDBEARPSERVICEAFMSATMSSW10 SW5PCMSYNMICNMICPBEARNJ1159 6050484749The links shownon J11 must bein place toaccess audio on J8, J9 or CP1
USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT33LZT 123 7263 R1AAll switches are mounted on the front panel of the developer’s box.Switch Description OperationVcc Toggle switch Switches power from external power supply tomodule. Has three positions; NC, OFF and ON.Switch to ON to connect power to the moduleON/OFF Push buttonswitch Switches module on and off. To power up themodule, push button for at least 2 seconds,until the yellow VIO LED is on. Repeat theprocess to turn the module offDCIO Toggle switch Maintain in OFF position to prevent damage tothe module. Included only for backwardscompatibilityConnector Description ConnectionsUART1(EDB) 9-wayDsocket(accessibleon the rearpanel)Full 9-pin RS232 communication port. Usedduring run-time to communicate with themodule (AT-commands, data transmission,etc.)UART2(ACB) 9-wayDsocket(accessibleon the rearpanel)3 line RS232 communications port(+SERVICE). Used during service andmaintenance operations. Also used todownload new software to the moduleUART3 9-wayDsocket(accessibleon the rearpanel)3 line serial port. RS232 levelsDCDRDRTSTDCTSDTR127384659RIRD2TD2127384659SERVICERD3TD3127384659
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL34 LZT 123 7263 R1AHandset RJ11 socket Connector for a standard telephonehandset. As PCM paths are open inside themodule, a default short circuit is madebetween PCMDLD-PCMIN and PCMULD-PCMOUT signals on test connector J11 toenable analogue audio in downlink anduplink directions. Jumpers are in placebetween pins 48 & 50 and between pins 47&49Pin # Signal1MICN2BEARN3BEARP4MICPPCM 8pinmini-DINconnector Carries PCM signalsPin # Signal1VIO(2.75Vd.c.output)2PCMULD3PCMDLD4PCMCLK5PCMSYNC6DGND7PCMIN8PCMOUT9DGNDJ4 SYSTEMconnector Allows direct connection of the module tothedevelopmentboard(seeFigure2.3,page 31)J5 SIM card testconnector Connector to gain access to the SIM cardsignals, which are connected in parallel withU10Pin # Signal1SIMVCC2SIMRST3SIMCLK4SIMDAT5 SIMPRESENCE6SIMGND7SIMGNDU10 SIM Holder Connector for SIM card. Signals are alsopresent at test connector J5, describedaboveEAR 3.5mm2-polejack socket Audio output (unbalanced) or Audio FromMobile Station (AFMS). Make sure jumpersare in place between pins 48 & 50 andbetween pins 47 & 49MIC 3.5mm2-polejack socket Audio input (unbalanced) or Audio ToMobile Station (ATMS). Signal source mustbe AC-coupled as a bias voltage forelectret microphones is provided(2.0 - 2.5Vd.c.). Make sure Jumpers are inplace between pins 48 & 50 and betweenpins 47 & 49Connector Description Connections1234123456987ground signal
USING THE DEVELOPER’S KIT35LZT 123 7263 R1AJ10 SYSTEMconnector For optional flat cable connection betweenthemoduleandthedevelopmentboard(see Figure 2.3, page 31)J11 TESTconnector 60 pin, 2.54mm pitch, dual row pin headerthat carries all signals present at the systemconnector of the module. Used for easytesting of the signals (see Figure 2.4,page 36)J12 Applicationconnector For flat cable connection between a hostapplication and the module. Most of thesignalspassthroughjumpersthatallowthedeveloper to select whether a specificsignal is routed to/from the developmentboard or to/from the host application. If noapplication is connected to J12, thesejumpers (SW1, SW3, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8,SW9, SW10 & SW11) serve as on/off switchesfor the module signals (see Figure 2.3,page 31)12v 2.1mm DCPower Socket Allows connection of anexternal power supply.Between 10V and 15V d.c. at6 watts is requiredRF SMA panelsocket Connect the supplied antennaConnector Description Connections
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL36 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.4 System Connector Pin AssignmentsRefer to the table below when monitoring signals on, or connecting to,J10, J11 or J12. The table shows the system-connector pin assignmentsfor the GM47 module.Figure 2.4 System connector pin assignments1VCC DGND 23VCC DGND 45VCC DGND 67VCC DGND 89VCC DGND 1011 VCC DGND 1213 Reserved for future use ON/OFF 1415 SIMVCC SIMPRESENCE 1617 SIMRST SIMDAT 1819 SIMCLK DAC 2021 IO1 IO2 2223 IO3 IO4 2425 VRTC ADC1 2627 ADC2 ADC3 2829 SDA SCL 3031 BUZZER OUT5 3233 LED VIO 3435 TX_ON RI 3637 DTR DCD 3839 RTS CTS 4041 TD (DTMS) RD (DFMS) 4243 TD3 (TX3) RD3 (RX3) 4445 TD2 (CTMS) RD2 (CFMS) 4647 PCMULD PCMDLD 4849 PCMOUT PCMIN 5051 PCMSYNC PCMCLK 5253 MICP MICN 5455 BEARP BEARN 5657 AFMS SERVICE 5859 ATMS AGND 601259 60J10, J11 & J12 pinnumberingviewed from thefront of thedeveloper’s box
Product Photo/IllustrationPart 3: Integrating theModule
39LZT 123 7263 R1A1. Mechanical Description1.1 Interface DescriptionThe pictures below show the mechanical design of the GM47 alongwith the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes. TheGM47 is protected with AISI 304 stainless steel covers that meet theenvironmental and EMC requirements.Figure 1.1 GM47 viewed from belowFigure 1.2 GM47, viewed from abovePlease note the following:• Mounting holes positioned at the corners make it possible tosecurely bolt the module into your application.Mounting hole/ground connectionAntenna connectorSystem connector
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL40 LZT 123 7263 R1A• Keypad, display, microphone, speaker and battery are not part of themodule.• The SIM card is mounted in your application, external to themodule.• The System Connector is a 60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitchtype. The pins and their electrical characteristics are described in“2. System Connector Interface”, page 41.• Information about the Antenna Connector is found in“3. Antenna Connector”, page 65.1.2 Physical DimensionsFigure 1.3 Dimensions of the GM47Measurements are given in millimetres. See also “Technical Data”,page 73.4.789.0046.4050.002.20 (4x)1.802.862.053.804.603.00 2.807.15 2.9030.202.3033.00
41LZT 123 7263 R1A2. System Connector Interface2.1 OverviewElectrical connections to the module (except the antenna), are madethrough the System Connector Interface. The system connector is a60-pin, standard 0.05in (1.27mm) pitch device.The system connector allows both board-to-board and board-to-cableconnections to be made. The table below shows two possible matingconnectors for use in your applications. Use the board-board connectorto connect the module directly to a PCB, and the board-cable connectorto connect the module via a cable.Figure 2.1 below shows the numbering of the connector pins.A ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RFconnector on the module as shown below. Connect this ground point tothe DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedance pathpossible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESD picked upby the antenna to bypass the module’s internal ground path.Figure 2.1 GM47, viewed from underneathPart Number Description9462-9101-606 Female, board-board connector (Speed Tech)TBD Female, board-cable connectorPin 59 Pin 1Pin 60 Pin 2Groundconnection
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL42 LZT 123 7263 R1AThe following table gives the pin assignments for the system connectorinterface and a short description for each signal.Note! Under the heading “Dir” in the table, module input and output signalsare indicated by the letters I and O respectively.Pin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description1VCC -Supply Power supply2DGND - - Digital ground3VCC -Supply Power supply4DGND - - Digital ground5VCC -Supply Power supply6DGND - - Digital ground7VCC -Supply Power supply8DGND - - Digital ground9VCC -Supply Power supply10 DGND - - Digital ground11 VCC -Supply Power supply12 DGND - - Digital ground13 Reserved forfuture use14 ON/OFF IInternal pullup, open drain Turns the module on and off.Former WAKE_B15 SIMVCC -Digital 3V/5V SIM card power supply. Power outputfrom module for SIM Card16 SIMPRESENCE IInternal pullup,opendrain SIM PresenceA “1” indicates that the SIM is missing; a“0”thatitisinserted17 SIMRST ODigital 3V/5V SIM card reset18 SIMDATA I/O Digital 3V/5V SIM card data19 SIMCLK ODigital 3V/5V SIM card clock20 DAC OAnalogue Digital to analogue converter21 IO1 IDigital 2.75 General purpose input/output 122 IO2 IDigital 2.75 General purpose input/output 223 IO3 IDigital 2.75 General purpose input/output 324 IO4 IDigital 2.75 General purpose input/output 425 VRTC ISupply 1.8V Supply for real time clock26 ADC1 IAnalogue Analogue to digital converter 127 ADC2 IAnalogue Analogue to digital converter 2
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE43LZT 123 7263 R1A28 ADC3 IAnalogue Analogue to digital converter 329 SDA I/O 2.75, internalpull up I2Cdata30 SCL O2.75, internalpull up I2Cclock31 BUZZER ODigital 2.75 Buzzer output from module32 OUT5 ODigital 2.75 Programmable output 533 LED ODigital 2.75 Flashing LED34 VIO OPower Out2.75V Module power indication. VIO is a2.75V at 75mA output supply that canbe used to power external circuitry thatinterfaces to the GM4735 TX_ON ODigital 2.75 This output indicates when the GSMmodule is going to transmit the burst36 RI ODigital 2.75 Ring Indicator (UART1)37 DTR IDigital 2.75 Data Terminal Ready (UART1)38 DCD ODigital 2.75 Data Carrier Detect (UART1)39 RTS IDigital 2.75 Request To Send (UART1)40 CTS ODigital 2.75 Clear To Send (UART1)41 TD IDigital 2.75 Transmitted Data (UART1).Data from DTE (host) to DCE (module).Former DTMS42 RD ODigital 2.75 Received Data (UART1).Data from DCE (module) to DTE (host).Formerly DFMS43 TD3 IDigital 2.75 UART3 transmission44 RD3 ODigital 2.75 UART3 reception45 TD2 IDigital 2.75 UART2 transmission. Used for flashingthe memory. Former CTMS46 RD2 ODigital 2.75 UART2 Reception. Used for flashing thememory. Former CFMS47 PCMULD IDigital 2.75 DSP PCM digital audio input48 PCMDLD ODigital 2.75 DSP PCM digital audio output49 PCMOUT ODigital 2.75 Codec PCM digital audio output50 PCMIN IDigital 2.75 Codec PCM digital audio input51 PCMSYNC ODigital 2.75 DSP PCM frame sync52 PCMCLK ODigital 2.75 DSP PCM clock output53 MICP IAnalogue Microphone Input positive54 MICN IAnalogue Microphone Input negative55 BEARP OAnalogue Speaker output positivePin Signal Name Dir Signal Type Description
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL44 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.2 General Electrical and Logical CharacteristicsMany of the signals, as indicated in the table above, are high-speedCMOS logic inputs or outputs powered from a 2.75V±5% internalvoltage regulator, and are defined as Digital 2.75V. Whenever a signalis defined as Digital 2.75V, the following electrical characteristicsapply.2.2.1 General Protection Requirements• All 2.75V digital inputs will continuously withstand and suffer nodamage in the power-on or power-off condition when subjected toany voltage from -0.5V to 3.47V (3.3V+5%).• All 2.75V digital outputs will continuously withstand a short circuitto any other voltage within the range 0V to 3V.• All analogue outputs will continuously withstand a short circuit toany voltage within the range 0V to 3V.• The SIM output signals and the SIMVCC supply will continuouslywithstand a short circuit to any voltage within the range 0V to 5.8V.56 BEARN OAnalogue Speaker output negative57 AFMS OAnalogue Audio output from module58 SERVICE I2.7V Flash programming voltage for the MS.Enable logger information if notflashing. Formerly VPPFLASH59 ATMS IAnalogue Audio input to module60 AGND - - Analogue groundPin Signal Name Dir Signal Type DescriptionParameter Min. Max. UnitsHigh Level Output Voltage (VOH), Io=–2mA 2.2 2.75 VLow Level Output Voltage (VOL), Io=2mA 00.6 VHigh Level Input Voltage (VIH)1.93 2.75 VLow Level Input voltage (VIL) 0 0.8 V
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE45LZT 123 7263 R1A2.3 GroundsThere are two ground connections in the GM47, AGND (analogueground) and DGND (digital ground). Pin assignments are shown in thetable above.Note! AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. Theymust not be joined together in your application.2.3.1 Analogue Ground - AGNDAGND is the return signal, or analogue audio reference, for ATMS(Audio To Mobile Station) and AFMS (Audio From Mobile Station).2.3.2 Digital Ground - DGNDDGND is the reference or return signal for all system interface digitalsignals and is also the d.c. return for SERVICE and the power supply,VCC. Connect all DGND pins together in your application in order tocarry the current drawn by the module.2.4 VCC - Regulated Power Supply InputPower is supplied to the module VCC pins, from an external source.Connect all VCC pins together in your application in order to carry thecurrent drawn by the module.Pin Signal Description2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 DGND Digital ground60 AGND Analogue groundParameter LimitImax ≅12.5mAPins Signal Description1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 VCC regulated power supply input
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL46 LZT 123 7263 R1AThe electrical characteristics for VCC are shown in the table below.Note! GM47 has no internal capacitance to supply the large current peaksduring GSM burst transmission. We recommend you follow thesegeneral guidelines:• Fit a low ESR electrolytic capacitor close to the module: minimumvalue 1,000µF, <100mΩESR.• Make sure power supply to module line resistance is <200mΩ.2.5 ON/OFF and External Power Signal2.5.1 Switching the module ON and OFFThe module is turned on and off by momentarily grounding theON/OFF pin. This input should be driven by an open collector, or otherdevice which will not tie the input high, to allow the internal alarm clockfunction to operate. See the table below for exact characteristics. In theOFF state the current consumption of the module is less than 100µA.The ON/OFF signal is a digital input with the following characteristics:Parameter Mode LimitVcc supply voltageNominal 3.6VToleranceincluding ripple aa. Measured at system connector pins.3.4V - 4.0VOver-voltage limit 5.5VMaximum ripple TBDMaximum allowable voltagedrop Burst transmission 200mVCurrent drawn, at full TXpower <600mA (average)<2A (peak)Pin Signal Dir Description14 ON/OFF IPulse signal to turn the module on or off34 VIO O2.75V supplied by the moduleParameter Min. Typ. Max. UnitsVoltage HIGH level (FALSE) VCC VVoltage LOW level (TRUE) 00.3 x VCC VPull-up resistance (internal) 39 kΩ
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE47LZT 123 7263 R1AThe following timing diagram illustrates both power-up and power-down processes.Figure 2.2 ON/OFF timing and VIO performanceTimes are defined as follows:2.5.2 VIO - 2.75V SupplyVIO provides an output voltage derived from an internal 2.75Vregulator. Its electrical characteristics are shown below.You can use this output for the following:• to indicate that the module is alive;• to power interface circuits, external to the module.ON/OFFVIOModulepoweredt1t2tpwrModule power-up Module power-downModule on Module offTime Description Min. Typ. Max. Unitst1Turn-on pulse time ≥2 st2Turn-off pulse time ≥1 sHardware-reset pulse timeaa. Active only when a full system reset is required.>10 stpwr Time for VIO and internal voltagesto be established 100 200 msParameter Min. Typ. Max. UnitsOutput Voltage (Iload =50mA) 2.70 2.75 2.85 VLoad current 75 mA
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL48 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.6 Analogue AudioATMS is the audio input, and AFMS is the audio output, of the module.These signals can be used in Hands-free or Portable Hands-free mode.Hands-free ModeThis mode is used for audio accessories, such as car kits and hands-freeequipment.Portable Hands-free ModeThis is the default mode. It activates a different amplification factor inthe ME, and activates a 2V microphone bias level for ATMS. The biaslevel is adjustable using AT*E2EAMS.2.6.1 Audio To Mobile Station - ATMSATMS is the analogue audio input to the module. Internally, the signalis sent to the CODEC (COder/DECoder), where it is converted to digitalaudio in PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) format. The encoded audio issent to PCMOUT via the internal PCM bus.ATMS provides a DC bias when it is used as the microphone input inPortable Hands-free applications. All other sources must bea.c.-coupled to avoid attenuation of low frequencies, and to preventincorrect biasing or damage to the ATMS input. Use a capacitor greaterthan the value shown in the table below.The ATMS input is a passive network followed by the transmit part ofthe CODEC.Pin Signal Dir Description57 AFMS OAudio from mobile station59 ATMS IAudiotomobilestation60 AGND -Ground (return) for analogue audioParameter LimitApplication driving impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz) ≤300ΩAC coupling capacitance a≥1µFModule input impedance (0.3 - 3.5kHz) >50kΩLow frequency cut-off (-3dB) 300Hz ± 50Hz
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE49LZT 123 7263 R1AThe following tables show the nominal PGA (programming gainsettings). For more information see the relevant AT commands.Maximum input voltage limit: 245mVrmsMaximum input level at MICI, 61.4mVrms output atPCMOUT = 3dBm0Output at AFMS for 3dBm0 at PCMINOutput at BEARN/BEARP for 3dBm0 at PCMIN2.6.2 Audio From Mobile Station - AFMSAFMS is the analogue audio output from the module and may be usedto drive a speaker or the ear-piece in a portable hands-free accessory.PCM digital audio signals, entering the module through the PCMIN pin,are translated to analogue signals by the CODEC. See “2.7 DigitalAudio”, page 52 for further information.High frequency cut-off (–3dB) >3500Hz±50HzOutput d.c. bias level Hands-free mode 0VPortable hands-free mode 2.0V ± 0.1VAdditional Gain in Portable hands-free mode 28.5dBa. The a.c.-coupling capacitance must be supplied by your application, unlessa d.c.-coupled microphone is used.Input Input (mVrms)TXAGC (dB) AUX AMPgain PCMOUT (dBm0)ATMS 245 013 3Input Differentialinput (mVrms)TXAGC (dB) AUX AMPgain PCMOUT (dBm0)MICNMICP 61.4 025 3Input dBm0 RXPGA Volumecontrol (dB) AFMS (mVrms)PCMIN 3 0 0 436Input dBm0 RXPGA Volumecontrol (dB) BEAR (mVrms)PCMIN 3 0 0 388Parameter Limit
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL50 LZT 123 7263 R1AThe table below shows the audio signal levels for AFMS.2.6.3 Microphone SignalsMICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input pins.These inputs are compatible with an electret microphone. Themicrophone contains an FET buffer with an open drain output, which issupplied with at least +2V relative to ground by the module as shownbelow.Figure 2.3 Microphone connections to the moduleParameter LimitSpeaker impedance 64Ω to 1kΩOutput Capacitance 2.2µF ±10%Levels (THD <5%)Drive capability into 5kΩ(0.3 - 3.5kHz) >2.4Vp-pDrive capability into 1.5kΩ (0.3 - 3.5kHz) >2.2Vp-pDrive capability into 150Ω(at 1kHz) >1.3Vp-pPin Speaker signals Dir Function53 MICP IMicrophone positive input54 MICN IMicrophone negative inputMICP1k1kGM47MICN68nF68nF2 - 2.5V@ 1mACODECAGND
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE51LZT 123 7263 R1A2.6.4 Speaker SignalsBEARP and BEARN are the speaker output pins. These aredifferential-mode outputs. The electrical characteristics are given in thetable below.The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can beconnected to BEARP and BEARN.Pin Speaker signals Dir Function55 BEARP OSpeaker positive output56 BEARN OSpeaker negative outputParameter LimitOutput level (differential) ≥4.0VppOutput level (dynamic load = 32Ω)≥2.8VppGain PCMINato BEARP/BEARN (differential)a. See PCMIN signal in “2.7 Digital Audio”, page 52–9dB ±1Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level ≤5%Offset, BEARP to BEARN ±30mVEar-piece mute-switch attenuation ≥40dBEar piece model Impedance ToleranceDynamic ear piece [32Ω + 800µH] // 100pF ±20%Dynamic ear piece [150Ω +800µH]//100pF ±20%Piezo ear piece 1kΩ +60nF ±20%
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL52 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.7 Digital AudioDigital PCM audio signals allow the connection of a digital audiosource/receiver, bypassing the analogue audio CODEC processingfunctions performed within the module.Figure 2.4 Pin connections to digital audioNote! When no external audio processing is performed, the following pinsmust be connected together:•PCMDLDtoPCMIN;• PCMULD to PCMOUT.Electrical characteristicsDigital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply.Pin Signal Dir Function52 PCMCLK OPCM clock51 PCMSYNC OPCM frame sync47 PCMULD IPCM audio input to DSP48 PCMDLD OPCM audio output from DSP50 PCMIN IPCM audio input to Codec49 PCMOUT OPCM audio output to CodecDSP CODECPCMSYNC & PCMCLKAnalogueaudiosignalsPCMINPCMOUTPCMDLDPCMULDLink for internaldigital-audio processingGM47System connector
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE53LZT 123 7263 R1APCM interface formatThe PCM format (for PCMULD and PCMDLD) conforms to the linearPCM data I/O format of the industry standard DSP from TexasInstruments. It is the same format as the one used between the CODECand the DSP in the module.PCMCLK (bit clock) and PCMSYNC (frame synchronisation) are bothgenerated by the DSP (Digital Signal Processor) in the module.The data words in PCMULD and PCMDLD are aligned so that the MSBin each word occurs on the same clock edge.2.8 Serial Data InterfacesThe serial channels, consisting of three UARTs, are asynchronouscommunication links to the application or accessory units. UART1 hasRS-232 functionality. UART2 and UART3 behave as general-purposeserial data links. In addition they are used for accessories and GPSrespectively.Digital 2.75V CMOS input/output electrical characteristics apply.The standard character format consists of 1 start bit, 8 bit data, no parityand 1 stop bit. In all, there are 10 bits per character.2.8.1 UART1 (RS232) - RD, TD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD and RIUART1 signals conform to a 9 pin RS232 (V.24) serial port, except forthe DSR (CCITT No107) signal. The DSR signal has been removed asit is usually connected to DTR in most systems.Pin Signal Dir Description RS232CCITT Nº41 TD ISerial data to module (UART1) 10342 RD OSerial data from module (UART1) 10439 RTS IRequest To Send (UART1) 10540 CTS OClear To Send (UART1) 10637 DTR IData Terminal Ready (UART1) 108.238 DCD OData Carrier Detect (UART1) 10936 RI ORing Indicator (UART1) 12545 TD2 IUART2 Data Transmission46 RD2 OUART2 Data Reception43 TD3 IUART3 Data Transmission44 RD3 OUART3 Data Reception
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL54 LZT 123 7263 R1ANote! UART1 signal levels do not match standard RS232 (V.28) levels. Therelationship between the levels is shown in the table below.Conversion between the module CMOS levels and RS232 levels can beachieved using a standard interface IC, such as the Maxim IntegratedProducts MAX3237.2.8.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TDThe default baud rate is 9.6kbits/s, however higher bit rates of up to460 kbits/s are supported, set by an AT command. UART1 starts at arate of 9.6kbits/s in standard AT command mode or binary mode (firstreceived data, AT or binary, will determine the operation mode). Themodule also supports GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol and starts whenthe appropriate command is sent.Serial Data From Module (RD)RD is an output signal that the module uses to send data via UART1 tothe application.Serial Data To Module (TD)TD is an input signal, used by the application to send data via UART1to the module.2.8.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RIUART1 control signals are active low and need a standard interface IC,such as the MAX3237, to generate standard RS232 levels.UART1 converted signals, together with DGND, RD and TD form a9-pin RS232 data port.RS232 level RD, TD RTS, CTS, DTR, DCD, RI CMOS level<–3V 1OFF >1.93V>+3V 0ON <0.80VParameter LimitApplication load resistance ≥100kΩApplication load capacitance <500pFParameter LimitApplication driving impedance <100ΩInput capacitance 1nFInput resistance (pull-up) 100kΩto VCC
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE55LZT 123 7263 R1ARTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1/10th of the datatransmission speed for data rates up to 460kbit/s (byte-oriented flowcontrol mechanism).Switching times for RTS and CTSThe table below shows the switching times.Request to Send (RTS)Used to condition the DCE for data transmission. The default level ishigh by internal pull up.The exact behaviour of RTS is defined by an AT command. Softwareof hardware control can be selected. Hardware flow is the defaultcontrol.The application must pull RTS low to communicate with the module.The module will respond by asserting CTS low, indicating it is ready forcommunication.Clear To Send (CTS)CTS indicates that the DCE is ready to transmit data. The default levelis high. You can define the exact behaviour of CTS through an ATcommand, and can select software or hardware flow control.The table below shows the load characteristics for this signal.Parameter LimitTime from Low to High level <2µsTime from High to Low level <2µsParameter LimitApplication driving impedance <100ΩInput capacitance <2nFInput resistance (pull-up) 100kΩto VCCParameter LimitApplication load capacitance <500pFApplication load resistance ≥1MΩ
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL56 LZT 123 7263 R1AData Terminal Ready (DTR)DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive data. It alsoacts as a hardware ‘hang-up’, terminating calls when switched high.The signal is active low. You can define the exact behaviour of DTRwith an AT command.Data Carrier Detect (DCD)DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier (data signal)when low. You can define the exact behaviour of DCD with an ATcommand.Ring Indicator (RI)RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE whenlow. You can define the exact behaviour or RI with an AT command.Data Set Ready (DSR)No DSR signal is provided. Use any DGND connection for thisfunctionality.2.8.4 UART2 - TD2, RD2UART 2 consists of a full duplex serial communication port withtransmission and reception lines.This communication port works in a mode called Operation andMaintenance.Operation and Maintenance mode works in combination with theSERVICE signal. Two events are possible if the SERVICE signal isactive when the module is turned on. These are:• the module is reprogrammed if UART2 is connected to a computerrunning Sony Ericsson update software;• the module enters logging mode and sends data to UART2 if noreprogramming information is received.Timing and electrical signals characteristics are the same as forUART1, TD and RD.Transmitted Data 2 (TD2)TD2 is used by the application to send data to the module via UART2.It has the same electrical characteristics as TD.Received Data 2 (RD2)RD2isusedtosenddatatotheapplicationviaUART2.Ithasthesameelectrical characteristics as RD.
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE57LZT 123 7263 R1A2.8.5 UART3 - TD3, RD3UART3 is a full duplex serial communication port with transmissionand reception lines. It has the same timing and electrical signalcharacteristics as UART1, TD and RD.Transmitted Data 3 (TD3)TD3 is used by your application to send data to the module via UART3.Received Data 3 (RD3)RD is used to send data to your application via UART3.2.9 SIM Card Related SignalsThese connections allow you to communicate with the SIM card holderin you application.Note! The distance between the SIM card holder and the module can be up to25cm.This SIM interface allows the use of 3V and 5V SIM cards. By defaultit works on 3V levels but will automatically switch to 5V, if a 5V SIMcard is fitted.Pin Signal Dir Description15 SIMVCC -SIM card power supply16 SIMPRESENCE ISIM card presence17 SIMRST OSIM card reset19 SIMCLK OSIM card clock18 SIMDATA I/O SIM card data
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL58 LZT 123 7263 R1ASIM voltage levels, as shown in the following table, are dependent onthe type of SIM card detected by the module.2.9.1 SIM Detection - SIMPRESENCESIMPRESENCE is used to determine whether a SIM card has beeninserted into or removed from the SIM card holder. You shouldnormally wire it to the “card inserted switch” of the SIM card holder,but different implementations are possible.When left open, an internal pull-up resistor maintains the signal highand means “SIM card missing” to the module. When pulled low themodule assumes a SIM card is inserted.SIMPRESENCE is a Digital 2.75 CMOS input with the followingelectrical characteristics.Signal Parameter Mode Min. Typ. Max. UnitSIMVCC SIM supply voltage 3V 2.7 3.0 3.3 V5V 4.5 5.0 5.5 VSIMDAT High Level Inputvoltage (VIH)3V 2.1 3.0 V5V 3.5 5.0 VSIMDAT Low Level Inputvoltage (VIL)3V 00.9 V5V 01.5 VSIMDAT High Level Outputvoltage (VOH)3V 2.7 3.0 V5V 4.7 5.0 VSIMDAT Low Level Outputvoltage (VOL)3V 00.2 V5V 00.2 VSIMCLKSIMRST High Level Outputvoltage (VOH)3V 2.4 3.0 V5V 4.4 5.0 VSIMCLKSIMRST Low Level Outputvoltage (VOL)3V 00.35 V5V 00.3 VParameter Min. Typ. Max. UnitsPull-up resistance (at 2.75 V) 100 kΩLow Level Input voltage (SIM inserted) 0.80 VHigh Level Input voltage (SIM missing) >1.93 2.75 V
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE59LZT 123 7263 R1A2.10 Service/ProgrammingWhen the SERVICE input signal is active the module will:• be reprogrammed if data is received through UART2 from acomputer running Sony Ericsson reprogramming software;• or it will output logging data on UART2.The electrical characteristics are given below. The signal reference isDGND.2.11 BuzzerConnecting the BUZZER signal to an inverting transistor-bufferfollowed by a piezoelectric transducer enables the module to play pre-programmed melodies or sounds.2.12 LEDThe LED states shown below, are hard coded.Pin Signal Dir Description58 SERVICE IFlash programming voltageMode SERVICE Voltage (V) Drive CapacityMin. Typ. Max.Normal Operation 0.8 -Service/enableprogramming 1.9 2.75 13.6 >1mAPin Signal Dir Description31 BUZZER OBuzzer output from modulePin Signal Dir Description33 LED OLED Output from moduleLED indication Operational statusNo indication NopowerorintheOFFstateGreen, steady Power on, not connected to a networkGreen, blinking Power on, connected to a network
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL60 LZT 123 7263 R1AThe following circuit should be used to connect an LED.Figure 2.5 Electrical connections for the LED2.13GeneralPurposeDigitalI/OPortsSignals which have an entry in the Default Signal column in the abovetable are multiplexed. Their operation depends on AT commands.The following table gives you the input impedance. These values onlyapply when the signals are configured as input signals.VIOLED2k222010kBC817GM47DGNDPin I/O portsignal Defaultsignal Description21 IO1 -Programmable Input/Output 122 IO2 -Programmable Input/Output 223 IO3 -Programmable Input/Output 324 IO4 -Programmable Input/Output 437 IN5 DTR Programmable input 5/Data Terminal Ready32 OUT5 -Programmable output 536 OUT6 RI Programmable Output 6/Data CarrierDetect38 OUT7 DCD Programmable Output 7/Ring indicatorParameter Min. Typ. Max. UnitsInput impedance (IO1 - IO4) (pull-up) 20 39 100 kΩInput impedance (IN5) 100 kΩ
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE61LZT 123 7263 R1A2.14 General Purpose Analogue I/O PortsThe module is able to convert digital to analogue signals and vice versa.2.14.1 Digital to Analogue Converter - DACThe DAC is an 8-bit converter. Conversion takes place when an ATcommand is sent to the module. The module sends the resultinganalogue value to the DAC pin.DAC output electrical characteristics are given in the following table.Pin Signal Dir Description20 DAC ODigital to analogue conversion output26 ADC1 IAnalogue to digital conversion input 127 ADC2 IAnalogue to digital conversion input 228 ADC3 IAnalogue to digital conversion input 3Parameter Limit UnitsResolution 8BitsOutput voltage for code = 0 (2.75ax0.05)± 0.05a. Tolerance on this internal voltage is ±5%VOutput voltage for code = 255 (2.75ax0.95)± 0.05 VNominal step size (2.75ax 0.9)/256 mVAbsolute errorbb. Referred to the ideal conversion characteristic.≤ ± 0.5 mVOutput wide-band noise and clockfeed-through 0-1.1MHz ≤0.5 mVrmsPower-supply rejection ratio 50Hz - 10kHz ≥40 dBConversion rate ± 0.5LSB ≤2(LoadA)cc. SeeFigure2.6,page62ms≤50 (Load B)cmsOutput buffer impedance when disabled ≥50 kΩOutput current source or sink ≥1mACurrent consumption (active) ≤1.0 mA
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL62 LZT 123 7263 R1AFigure 2.6 DAC loads2.14.2 Analogue to Digital Converters 1, 2 and 3 - ADCxThe ADC is an 8-bit converter. An analogue value applied to any of theADC pins is converted and stored in a register inside the module. Whenthe appropriate AT command is received by the module, the digitalvalue stored in the register is read.ADC electrical characteristics are shown in the table below.1kDGNDDAC1nF10nFLoad B100kDGNDDAC100 - 200pF Load AParameter Min. Max. UnitsResolution 88BitsInput voltage for 0000 0000 word 00.01 x 2.75aa. Tolerance on this internal voltage is ±5%VInput voltage for 1111 1111 word 0.99 x 2.75a2.75aVDifferential Non-Linearity (DNL) ±0.75 LSBOverall Non-Linearity (INL) ±0.60 LSBAbsolute accuracy ±1.5 LSBInput impedance 1 MΩAverage supply current(continuous conversion) 1mAExternal source impedance 50 kΩ
2. SYSTEM CONNECTOR INTERFACE63LZT 123 7263 R1A2.15 External I 2C Serial Control BusThe external I2C bus consists of two signals, SDA and SCL. This busis isolated from the module’s internal I2C bus to ensure properoperation of the module, even if the external I2C bus is damaged.The electrical characteristics are shown below.2.16 TX_ON - Burst TransmissionBurst transmission is the time when a GSM transceiver unit istransmitting RF signals. TX_ON indicates the module is going intotransmission mode.Pin Signal Dir Description29 SDA I/O I2Cserialdata30 SCL OI2C serial clockParameter Min. Typ. Max. UnitsTransmitoperationFrequency I2CCLK 81.25 400 kHzHigh or low I2CCLK 1.2 µsDelay time after falling edge of I2CCLK 308 308-1230 nsHold time after falling edge of I2CCLK 0nsReceiveoperationFrequency I2CCLK 400 kHzHigh or low I2CCLK 1.2 µsDelay time after falling edge of I2CCLK 100 nsHold time after falling edge of I2CCLK 0nsPin Signal Dir Description35 TX_ON OGSM module to transmit
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL64 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.17 Real Time ClockThe Real Time Clock provides the main microprocessor with a time-of-day calendar and alarm, and a one-hundred-year calendar.The Real Time Clock operates in two modes when connected to aseparate power supply:• RTC normal mode: the module is in ON or OFF mode and it issupplied with power (VCC is applied).• RTC back-up mode: VCC is disconnected and the RTC ismaintained by a separate backup power supply connected to theVRTC input (see Figure 2.7 below).Backup power is provided by a capacitor, golden-capacitor or battery inyour application and must be connected to the VRTC pin. During RTCnormal operation, the back up source will be charged.In back-up mode, the back-up source must provide enough power forRTC operation. Refer to the table for the amount of current required.The following table shows both voltage characteristics for both modes.If the voltage drops below 1.0 V in back-up mode, the RTC will stopworking. The following diagram shows the RTC connections.Figure 2.7 RTC connectionsPin Signal Dir Description25 VRTC -VoltagefortheRealTimeClockParameter Min. Typ. Max. UnitsSupply Voltage RTC (normal mode -charging the capacitor) 1.6 1.8 2.0 VSupply Voltage RTC (back-up mode -Capacitor provides the current) 1.0 1.8 2.0 VCurrent drawn 5.0 10.0 µABackupsupplyVRTC+GM47DGND
3. ANTENNA CONNECTOR65LZT 123 7263 R1A3. Antenna ConnectorThe module’s antenna connector allows transmission of the radiofrequency (RF) signals from the module to an external customer-supplied antenna. The connector is a micro-miniature coaxial MMCXsurface mounted component. A number of suitable MMCX type,mating plugs are available from the following manufacturers;• Amphenol;• Suhner;• IMS Connector Systems.The electrical characteristics of the antenna interface are shown below.Parameter Limit DescriptionNominal impedance 50Ω (better than 2:1)Output Power 2 Watt peak (Class 4) Extended GSM9001 Watt peak (Class 1) GSM1800Static Sensitivity Better than –104dBm Extended GSM900Better than –102dBm GSM1800
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL66 LZT 123 7263 R1A
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE67LZT 123 7263 R1A4. Hints for Integrating the ModuleThis chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate theGM47 into your application from a hardware perspective.Please read and consider the information under the following headingsbefore starting your integration work:• Safety advice and precautions.• Installation of the module.• Antenna.4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions4.1.1 General• Always ensure that use of the module is permitted. The module maypresent a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical electronicdevices. As a rule, the module must not be used in hospitals, airportsor planes.• You are responsible for observing your country’s safety standards,and where applicable the relevant wiring rules.• Never use the module at a gas station, refuelling point, blasting areaor in any other environment where explosives may be present.• Operating the module close to other electronic devices, such asantennas, television sets, and radios may cause electromagneticinterference.• Never try to dismantle the module yourself. There are nocomponents inside the module that can be serviced by the user. Ifyou attempt to dismantle the module, you may invalidate thewarranty.• To protect the power supply cables and meet the fire safetyrequirements, it is recommended that the electrical circuits aresupplied with a power regulator. The power regulator should beplaced as close to the terminals of the power supply as possible.• Do not connect any incompatible component or product to theGM47. Note, Sony Ericsson does not warrant against defects, non-conformities or deviations caused thereby.4.1.2 SIM Card• Before handling the SIM card in your application, ensure that youare not charged with static electricity. Use proper precautions toavoid electrostatic discharges. The module must be switched offbefore the SIM card is installed in your application.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL68 LZT 123 7263 R1A• When the SIM card hatch is opened, the SIM card connectors lieexposed under the SIM card holder. CAUTION: Do not touch theseconnectors! If you do, you may release an electrical discharge thatcould damage the module or the SIM card.• When designing your application, the SIM card’s accessibilityshould be taken into account. We always recommend that you havethe SIM card protected by a PIN code. This will ensure that the SIMcard cannot be used by an unauthorized person.4.1.3 Antenna• If the antenna is to be mounted outside, consider the risk oflightning. Follow the instructions provided by the antennamanufacturer.• Never connect more than one module to a single antenna. Themodule can be damaged by radio frequency energy from thetransmitter of another module.• Like any mobile station, the antenna of the module emits radiofrequency energy. To avoid EMI (electromagnetic interference), youmust determine whether the application itself, or equipment in theapplication’s proximity, needs further protection against radioemission and the disturbances it might cause. Protection is securedeither by shielding the surrounding electronics or by moving theantenna away from the electronics and the external signals cable.• The module and antenna may be damaged if either come into contactwith ground potentials other than the one in your application.Beware, ground potential are not always what they appear to be.• In the final application, the antenna must be positioned more than20cm away from human bodies. When this rule cannot be applied,the application designer is responsible for providing the SARmeasurement test report and declaration.4.2 Installation of the Module4.2.1 Where to Install the ModuleThere are several conditions which need to be taken into considerationwhen designing your application as they might affect the module and itsfunction. They are:Environmental ConditionsThe module must be installed so that the environmental conditionsstated in the Technical Data chapter, such as temperature, humidity andvibration are satisfied. Additionally, the electrical specifications in theTechnical Data section must not be exceeded.
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE69LZT 123 7263 R1ASignal StrengthThe module has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signalstrength. To improve signal strength, the antenna can be moved toanother position. Signal strength may depend on how close the moduleis to a radio base station. You must ensure that the location at which youintend to use the module, is within the network coverage area.Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance fromanother source, for example an electronic device in the immediatevicinity. More information about possible communication disturbancescan be found in section 4.3.5, page 72.When an application is completed, you can verify signal strength byissuing the AT command AT+CSQ. See “AT+CSQ Signal Strength”,page 118.Tip! Before installing the module, use an ordinary mobile telephone to checka possible location for it. In determining the location for the module andantenna, you should consider signal strength as well as cable lengthConnection of Components to GM47The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system. Incorrectlydesigned or installed, external components may cause radiation limits tobe exceeded. For instance, improperly made connections or improperlyinstalled antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions inthe module or equipment.Network and Subscription• Before your application is used, you must ensure that your chosennetwork provides the necessary telecommunication services.Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary information.• If you intend to use SMS in the application, ensure this is included inyour (voice) subscription.• Consider the choice of the supplementary services described insection “2.3.2 Short Message Service”, page 18.4.2.2 How to Install the ModulePower Supply• Use a high-quality power supply cable with low resistance. Thisensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within the allowedrange, even during the maximum peak current. An electrolyticcapacitor should be placed close to the power supply pins of themodule to supply the peak currents during burst transmission. See“VCC - Regulated Power Supply Input”, page 45.• See section “2.2.1 General Protection Requirements”, page 44.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL70 LZT 123 7263 R1AGroundsA ground connection is provided at the mounting hole next to the RFconnector on the module (see Figure 2.1, page 41). Connect this groundpoint to the DGND pins of the module by the shortest, low-impedancepath possible. The purpose of this connection is to allow any ESDpicked up by the antenna to bypass the module’s internal ground path.Note! It is recommended that you use a cable with a maximum resistance of5mΩ for the ground connection.Note! AGND and DGND are connected at a star point inside the module. Theymust not be joined together in your application.AudioUse a coupling capacitor in ATMS line if the application does not usethe module’s bias voltage. See also “Figure 2.3 Microphoneconnections to the module”, page 50.Software UpgradeTo upgrade the software, the system connector must be accessible inyour application. The pins SERVICE, TD, RD and the power signalsare used for this purpose. Please contact customer support for moredetails.4.3 Antenna4.3.1 GeneralThe antenna is the component in your system that maintains the radiolink between the network and the module. Since the antenna transmitsand receives electromagnetic energy, its efficient function will dependon:• the type of antenna (for example, circular or directional);• the placement of the antenna;• communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antennaoperates.In the sections below, issues concerning antenna type, antennaplacement, antenna cable, and possible communication disturbances areaddressed.In any event, you should contact your local antenna manufacturer foradditional information concerning antenna type, cables, connectors,antenna placement, and the surrounding area. You should also
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODULE71LZT 123 7263 R1Adetermine whether the antenna needs to be grounded or not. Your localantenna manufacturer might be able to design a special antenna suitablefor your the application.4.3.2 Antenna TypeMake sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the module.Consider the following requirements:• the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in use:EGSM/GSM900/1800 for the GM47 andGSM850/1900 for the GM48;• the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 50Ω;• the antenna output-power handling must be a minimum of 2W;• the VSWR value should be less than 3:1 to avoid damage to themodule.4.3.3 Antenna PlacementThe antenna should be placed away from electronic devices or otherantennas. The recommended minimum distance between adjacentantennas, operating in a similar radio frequency band, is at least 50cm.If signal strength is weak, it is useful to face a directional antenna at theclosest radio base station. This can increase the strength of the signalreceived by the module.The module’s peak output power can reach 2W. RF field strength varieswith antenna type and distance. At 10cm from the antenna the fieldstrength may be up to 70V/m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7V/m.In general, CE-marked products for residential and commercial areas,and light industry can withstand a minimum of 3V/m.4.3.4 The Antenna CableUse 50Ω impedance low-loss cable and high-quality 50Ω impedanceconnectors (frequency range up to 2GHz) to avoid RF losses. Ensurethat the antenna cable is as short as possible.The Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR) may depend on theeffectiveness of the antenna, cable and connectors. In addition, if youuse an adapter between the antenna cable and the antenna connector, itis crucial that the antenna cable is a high-quality, low-loss cable.Minimize the use of extension cables, connectors and adapters. Eachadditional cable, connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL72 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.3.5 Possible Communication DisturbancesPossible communication disturbances include the following:•Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radio transmitters.•Path-loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadilydecreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter.•Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio signalscaused by hills, buildings, trees or even vehicles. This can be aparticular problem inside buildings, especially if the walls are thickand reinforced.•Multi-path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signalstrength. This is the result of interference caused when direct andreflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously. Surfaces such asbuildings, streets, vehicles, etc., can reflect signals.•Hand-over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the GSMnetwork. Your mobile application call is transferred from one cell tothe next. Hand-over can briefly interfere with communication andmay cause a delay, or at worst, a disruption.
5. TECHNICAL DATA73LZT 123 7263 R1A5. Technical DataMechanical SpecificationsPower supply voltage, normal operationRadio specificationsSIM cardMaximum length 50mmMaximum width 33mmMaximum thickness 7.15mm (excluding connector pins andtop of antenna connector)Weight 18.5gVoltage 3.6V nominal (3.4V - 4.0V)Ripple <100mV @ 200kHz; <20mV @ >200kHzVoltage must always stay within a normal operating range, ripple includedPower consumptionVoice/CSD: <250mA (<2A peak)Data (GPRS 4+1); <350mA (<2A peak)Idle mode: <5mASwitched off: <100µAFrequency range GM47: EGSM 900MHz and 1800MHz (dual band)GM48: GSM 850MHz and 1900MHz (dual band)Maximum RF outputpower GM47: 2WGM48: 1WAntenna impedance 50Ω3Vor5V Support of external SIM card
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL74 LZT 123 7263 R1AEnvironmental specificationsData StorageOperating temperaturerange -25°C to +55°CStorage temperaturerange -40°C to +85°CMaximum relativehumidity 95% at +40°CStationary vibration,sinusoidal Displacement: 7.5mmAcceleration amplitude: 20m/s² and 40m/s²Frequency range: 2-8Hz, 8-200Hz, 200-500HzStationary vibration,random Acceleration spectral density (m²/s²):0.96, 2.88, 0.96Frequency range:5-10Hz, 10-200Hz, 200-500Hz, 60min/axisNon-stationary vibration,including shock Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration:3shocksineachaxisanddirection;300m/s², 11msShock response spectrum II, peak acceleration:3shocksineachaxisanddirection;1000m/s², 6msBump Acceleration: 250m/s²Free fall transportation 1.2mRolling pitchingtransportation Angle: ±35degrees; period: 8sStatic load 10kPaLow air pressure/high airpressure 70kPa/106kPaSMS storage capacity 40 in MEIn addition, the unit can handle as manySMS as the SIM can storePhone book capacity 100
Product Photo/IllustrationPart 4: Using AT Commands
77LZT 123 7263 R1A1. Introduction to AT Commands1.1 OverviewAT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used tocontrol and implement the functions of the module.Using AT commands, the following actions are possible:• Control of DCE•GPRS• Call control• Supplementary Service• SIM application tool kitThe GM47 contains a large number of Ericsson-specific commands inaddition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and ITU-Trecommendations. These commands are provided to enhance thefunctions of the module. The Ericsson-specific commands are identifiedby the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax descriptionprovided below).1.2 Syntax DescriptionThis section provides a brief description of the syntax used for theGM47, AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter foradditional information.1.2.1 ConventionsIn this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the ATcommands.<command> The name of the command that is to be entered.<parameter> The parameter values that are defined for a certaincommand.<CR> The command line is terminated by the CarriageReturn or Enter key.<LF> Line feed character.< > The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntacticalelement. The brackets do not appear in the commandline.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL78 LZT 123 7263 R1A[ ] Square brackets are used to indicatethat a certainitemis optional. For example, sub-parameters of acommand or an optional part of a response. Thebrackets do not appear in the command line.Value The default values of the supported parameters areindicated by using bold text when presenting thevalue.• Other characters, including ‘?’, ‘=’, parenthesis, etc., appear incommands and responses as written.• The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> andCMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.2.3, AT Response Syntax and1.3, Error Codes) are not listed under “Possible Responses” for eachAT command.• OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.1.2.2 AT Command SyntaxThe AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each commandis made up of the following three elements:• the prefix;• the body;• the termination character.The prefix consists of the letters “AT”, which are derived from the firsttwo letters of the word attention. The body is made up of the command,the parameter, and if applicable the associated values.Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spacesbetween the individual bodies are ignored.Basic Syntax CommandThe format of basic syntax commands is as follows:AT<command>[=][<parameter>]Example! ATL=0<CR> (sets the volume of the speaker)Additional commands may follow a command on the same commandline without any character being required for separation. For thecommand D parameters, see the description for the command inquestion.A version of the basic syntax is:AT<command><parameter>Extended Syntax Command• AT+<command>= [<parameter>]
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS79LZT 123 7263 R1A• AT*<command>=[<parameter>]Example! AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the module)If several values are included in the command, they are separated bycommas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values.Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on thesame command line if a semicolon (;IRA 3B) is inserted after thepreceeding extended command as a separator.Read Command SyntaxThe read command is used to check the current values ofparameters. Type ‘?’, after the command line:• AT+<command>?• AT*<command>?• AT<command>?Example! AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set)<CR>“IRA”<CR>(information text response)<CR>OK<CR>(final result code response)Test Command SyntaxThe test command is used to test whether the command has beenimplemented or to give information about the type of subparameters itcontains. Type ‘?’, after the command line:• AT+<command>=?• AT*<command>=?Example! AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the responseparameters)<CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values)<CR>OK<CR> (final result code)If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERRORis issued.Note! Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list ofsupported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of theparameter values.1.2.3 AT Response SyntaxThe default mode response shown below, is in text mode. See thecommand V for further details.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL80 LZT 123 7263 R1APossible formats for the result codes are:• Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also hasa numerical equivalent.• Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or anasterisk (*):– AT+<command>: <parameter >– AT*<command>: <parameter>where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a singlespace character separates the colon character from the <parameter>. If several values are included in the result code, they are separated bycommas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. Theextended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They arealways issued in alphabetical form.• Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by<CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses bylooking for a final result code response, such as OK.There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:Final Result CodeA final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the commandis completed and another command may be issued.• If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the resultcode OK.• If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which hadthe wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It isERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by anerror code.Final result codes are:Value General meaningOK Command executed, no errorsERROR Invalid command or command line too longNO DIALTONE No dialling possible, wrong modeBUSY Remote station busyNO ANSWER Connection completion time-outNO CARRIER Link not established or disconnectedUnsolicited Result CodeUnsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directlyassociated with a command being issued from the TE.
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS81LZT 123 7263 R1A1.3 Error Codes1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If+CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in acommand line, none of the commands in the same command line willbe executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as aresult of a completed commandline execution). The format of <err> canbe either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEEcommand.The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.<err> Description Syntax0Phone failure1No connection to phone2Phone -adaptor link reserved3Operation not allowed4Operation not supported5PH-SIM PIN required10 SIM not inserted11 SIM PIN required12 SIM PUK required13 SIM failure14 SIM busy15 SIM wrong16 Incorrect password17 SIM PIN2 required18 SIM PUK2 required20 Memory full21 Invalid index22 Not found23 Memory failure24 Text string too long25 Invalid characters in text string26 Dial string too long27 Invalid characters in dial string30 No network service
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL82 LZT 123 7263 R1A1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code)This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment orto the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code.None of the following commands in the same command line will beexecuted. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERRORis returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalidparameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails.The syntax is as follows:+CMS ERROR: <err>Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.31 Network time-out32 Network not allowed - emergency calls only100 Unknown101- 255 Reserved by ETS<err> Description Syntax<err> Description0 - 127 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values128 - 255 GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values300 ME failure301 SMS service of ME reserved302 Operation not allowed303 Operation not supported304 Invalid PDU mode parameter305 Invalid text mode parameter310 SIM not inserted311 SIM PIN required312 PH-SIM PIN required313 SIM failure314 SIM busy315 SIM wrong316 SIM PUK required317 SIM PIN2 required318 SIM PUK2 required320 Memory failure
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS83LZT 123 7263 R1A1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT CommandsAfter every group of AT commands there is a section where some of themore complicated commands are exemplified. For a detaileddescription of the command in question (valid parameter values, ATcommand syntax and Response syntax) you are recommended to see itsown descriptive section.321 Invalid memory index322 Memory full330 SMSC address unknown331 No network service332 Network time-out340 No +CNMA acknowledgment expected500 Unknown error- 511 Other values in range 256 - 511 are reserved512- Manufacturer specific<err> Description
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL84 LZT 123 7263 R1A
85LZT 123 7263 R1A2. Call Control2.1 AT+CPIN PIN ControlSee 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control2.2 ATA Answer Incoming CallSignals the MS to answer an incoming call. The command is followedby a final result code such as OK or ERROR, and the MS enters thecommand state.Description Command Possible ResponsesAnswer an incomingcall ATA •ERROR•OK
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL86 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.3 ATD DialUsed to initiate a phone connection, which may be data or voice (phonenumber terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establishthe connection will consist of digits and modifiers, or a stored numberspecification.If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone thatthe number is a voice rather than a data number.If the dial string is omitted, and the semicolon included, the commandinstructs the ME to do a network detect. If the network is available OKis returned.Abortability:Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission fromthe DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall besufficient to abort the command in progress; however, charactersDescription Syntax Possible Responses• Originate a call anddial the phonenumber specified inthe command as<dial_string>or•DoanetworkdetectATD<dial_string>[;] •CONNECT•CONNECT<text>• NO CARRIER•ERROR•NODIALTONE•BUSY•OKDial the phone numberstored in the mobilephone which islocated by the index<I>ATD>ME<I>[;] •CONNECT•CONNECT<text>• NO CARRIER•ERROR•NODIALTONE•BUSY•OKDial the phone numberstored in the SIM cardwhich is located by theindex <I>ATD>SM<I>[;] •CONNECT•CONNECT<text>• NO CARRIER•ERROR•NODIALTONE•BUSY•OKDial the phone numberstored in the Lastdialled number list onthe SIM card, which islocated by the index<I>The most recentlydialled number isassumed to have<I>="1"ATD>LD<I>[;] •CONNECT•CONNECT<text>• NO CARRIER•ERROR•NODIALTONE•BUSY•OKRedial the last phonenumber dialled.Ericsson specificATDL[;] ...
2. CALL CONTROL87LZT 123 7263 R1Atransmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of thetermination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to appendadditional control characters such as line feed after the command linetermination character.<dial_string> Description“0123456789*#+” Valid characters for originationWThe W modifier is ignored but is included only forcompatibility purposes,The comma modifier is ignored but is included only forcompatibility purposesTThe T modifier is ignored but is included only forcompatibility purposesPThe P modifier is ignored but is included only forcompatibility purposes<Final ResultCode> DescriptionCONNECT If connection is successfully established, only valid for dataconnectionsCONNECT<text> If connection is successfully established, only valid for dataconnectionsNO CARRIER Unable to establish a connection or the connectionattempt was aborted by the userERROR An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish theconnectionNO DIALTONE The mobile phone is being used for a voice call or is notwithin coverage of the networkBUSY The phone number called is engaged, valid for data andvoice connectionsOK Only valid for voice connections<text> Description28800 Connected with data bit rate of 28800 bits/s (HSCSD)19200 Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)14400 Connected with data bit rate of 14400 bits/s (HSCSD)9600 Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s4800 Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s2400 Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL88 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.4 ATH Hang upSignals the MS to terminate an active call.2.5 ATL Monitor Speaker LoudnessControls the volume of the monitor speaker. The specific loudness levelindicated by “low”, “medium” and “high” is manufacturer specific. It isintended to indicate increasing volume.Description Command Possible ResponsesTerminate the call ATH •ERROR•OKDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest monitorspeaker loudness ATL[<value>] •OK•ERRORShows the currentsetting ATL? L: <value>Answer an incomingcall ATL=? L: (list of supported<values>s)<value> Description0-14dB (minimum speaker volume)1-10.5dB2-7dB3-3.5dB40dB (nominal speaker volume)53.5dB67dB710.5dB814dB (maximum speaker volume)
2. CALL CONTROL89LZT 123 7263 R1A2.6 ATO Return to Online Data ModeSwitch to theon-line data mode from the on-line command mode duringan active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.2.7 ATP Select Pulse DiallingCommand is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. Itwould normally cause the next D command to use pulses when diallingthe number.2.8 ATT Select Tone DiallingCommand is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. Itwould normally cause the next D command to use tones when diallingthe number.Description Command Possible ResponsesReturn to on-line datamode ATO[<value>] •CONNECT•CONNECT<text>•NOCARRIER•ERROR<value> Description0Return to on-line data state from on-line commandDescription Command Possible ResponsesSelect pulse dialling ATP OKShow if the commandis supported? ATP=? OKDescription Command Possible ResponsesSelect tone dialling ATT OKShow if the commandis supported? ATT=? OK
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL90 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.9 ATX Call Progress Monitoring ControlDefines if the dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are to be usedduring a call.Note! If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if “NODIALTONE” or “NO CARRIER” will be returned. If the call recipientis busy, the <n> parameter will decide if “BUSY” or “NO CARRIER”will be returned.2.10 AT+CHUP Hang up CallCauses the TA to hang-up the current call of the ME.If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incomingcall shall be rejected.Note! The purpose of this command is not to replace the V.25ter [4] commandH, but to give an assured procedure to terminate an alternating modecall.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet call progressmonitoring control ATX=[<n>] or ATX[<n>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATX? X: <n>Show if the commandis supported? ATX=? X: (list of supported<n>s)<n> Description0Body and dial tone detection off. No line speed reportedon connection1Body and dial tone detection off. Report line speed onconnection2Busydetectiononanddialtonedetectionoff.Reportlinespeed on connection3Busy detect off and dial tone on. Report line speed onconnection4Busy detect and dial tone detection on. Report linespeed on connection. Default valueDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest hang-up AT+CHUP •OK•ERRORShow if the commandsis supported AT+CHUP=? •OK•ERROR
2. CALL CONTROL91LZT 123 7263 R1A2.11 AT+CMOD Call ModeSelects the call mode of further dialing commands (D) or for nextanswering command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. Inthis ETS, terms “alternating mode” and “alternating call” refer to allGSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basicservice (voice, data, fax) within one call.When single mode is selected the call originating and hang-upprocedures are similar to procedures specified in ITU-TRecommendations V.25ter [4], T.31 [5] and T.32 [6]. In GSM there canbe voice followed by data (refer GSM 02.02 [7]), alternating voice/data(refer GSM 02.02 [7]) and alternating voice/fax calls (refer GSM 02.03[8]).Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue.Note! +CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed alternating modecall. It is set to zero also after a failed answering. The power-up, factory(&F) and user resets (Z), also set the value to zero. This reduces thepossibility that alternating mode calls are originated or answeredaccidentally.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest Call Mode AT+CMOD=[<mode>]•OK•ERRORShows the currentsetting AT+CMOD? •+CMOD:<mode>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMOD=? •+CMOD:(listofsupported<mode>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Single mode (default)In order to avoid accidental originating or answering ofalternating calls is <mode> set to single mode in followingcases:- after a successfully completed alternating mode call;- after a unsuccessful answering;- after successfully execution of the commands &F and Z1Alternating voice/fax (teleservice # 61). Not Supported2Alternating voice/data (bearer service #61). Not Supported3Voice followed by data (bearer service # 81). Not Supported4..127 Reserved by GSM 07.07. Not Supported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL92 LZT 123 7263 R1A2.12 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-UpSelects whether ATH or “drop DTR” causes a voice connection to bedisconnected or not. Voice connection also includes alternating modecalls that are currently in voice mode.Note! When <mode>=2, this command must be viewed in conjunction withthe V.25ter [3] command &D, or &D will be ignored.2.13 AT+VTS DTMF and Tone GenerationThis command allows the transmission of DTMF tones. These tonesmay be used, for example, when announcing the start of a recordingperiod. The command is write only. In this profile of commands, thecommand does not operate in data or fax modes of operation(+FCLASS=0,1,2-7).Note! The ATD-command is used only for dialing. It is not possible togenerate arbitrary DTMF tones using the ATD command.Description Syntax Possible ResponsesSet Command +CVHU=[<mode>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OKRead command +CVHU? •+CVHU:<mode>•+CMEERROR:<err>Test if the command issupported +CVHU=? +CVHU (list ofsupported <mode>s)<mode> Description0“Drop DTR” ignored but OK response given. ATHdisconnects1“Drop DTR” and ATH ignored but OK response given2“Drop DTR” behavior according to &D setting. ATHdisconnects. DefaultDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest transmission ofDTMF tone(s) AT+VTS=<DTMF> OKERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+VTS=? OKERROR
2. CALL CONTROL93LZT 123 7263 R1ANote! The AT+VTS command is used only during a voice call.<DTMF> DescriptionASCIIcharacterstringAn ASCII character string with entries in the set 0-9, #, *, A-D separated by commas. Each entry is interpreted as asingle ACSII character.Example: The string “8,9” sends two DTMF tones, “8”followed by “9”
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL94 LZT 123 7263 R1A
95LZT 123 7263 R1A3. Control and Status3.1 ATQ Result Code SuppressionDetermines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE.When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate,final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, ortrailer - is transmitted.Note! The Ingo-module triggers on the response from ref. Point E. It istherefore not possible to turn off the response in ref. Point E.3.2 ATS0 Automatic Answer ControlDefines the automatic answering feature of the modem. A non-zerovalue specifies the number of rings before the call is answered.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet Result CodeSuppression ATQ[=]<value> •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATQ? Q: <value>Show if the commandis supported ATQ=? Q: (list of supported<value>s)<value> Description0DCE transmits result codes. Default value1Result codes are suppressed and not transmittedDescription Command Possible ResponsesAutomatic answercontrol ATS0=[<rcnt>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATS0? <rcnt>Show if the commandis supported ATS0=? S0: (list of supported<rcnt>s)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL96 LZT 123 7263 R1ANote! Call is always answered in the current fax class, regardless of whetherthe incoming call is voice, data, or fax.3.3ATS2 EscapeSequenceCharacterDefines the character to be used as the escape sequence character whenswitching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. Theresponse to the command is modified to reflect the change.Note! If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128-255, theescape sequence detection is disabled.3.4 ATS3 Command Line Termination CharacterThis S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the characterrecognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incomingcommand line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header,trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along withthe S4 parameter.<rcnt> Description0Disable automatic answer. Default value1-7 Answer after the specified number of ringsDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet escape sequencecharacter ATS2=[<esc>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATS2 <esc>Show if the commandis supported ATS2=? S2: (list of supported<esc>s)<esc> Description43 Escape sequence character. Default value0 to 255 Escape sequence characterDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet Command LineTermination Character ATS3=<value> •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATS3? <value>Show if the commandis supported ATS3=? S3: (list of supported<value>s)
3. CONTROL AND STATUS97LZT 123 7263 R1AThe previous value of S3 is used to determine the command linetermination character for entry of the command line containing the S3setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3was previously set to 13 and the command line "ATS3 30" is issued, thecommand line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but theresult code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5 2/14) in place of the <CR>.3.5 ATS4 Response Formatting CharacterThis S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the charactergenerated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator forresult codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see thedescription of the V parameter for usage).If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issuedin response to that command line will use the new value of S4.<value> Description13 Command line termination character, Default value0 to 127 Command line termination characterDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet ResponseFormatting Character ATS4=<value> •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATS4? <value>Show if the commandis supported ATS4=? S4: (list of supported<value>s)<value> Description10 Formatting character. Default value0 to 127 Formatting character
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL98 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the characterrecognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line theimmediately preceding character.3.7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay ControlDefines the number of seconds to wait before call addressing when adial tone is not detected. This command is ignored by the InfraredModem and is only included for compatibility.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest CommandLine Editing Character ATS5=<value> •OK•ERRORShows the currentsetting ATS5? <value>Show if the commandis supported ATS5=? S5: (list of supported<value>s)<value> Description8Line editing character. Default value0 to 127 Line editing characterDescription Command Possible ResponsesBlind dial delay control ATS6=[<dly>] OKRead the currentsetting ATS6? <dly>Show if the commandis supported ATS6=? S6: (list of supported<dly>s)<dly> Description2Wait two seconds before blind dialling.Default value.2-255 Number of seconds to wait before blind dialling
3. CONTROL AND STATUS99LZT 123 7263 R1A3.8 ATS7 Connection Completion TimeoutDefines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling andthe connection being established. If this time is exceeded then theconnection is aborted.3.9 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay ControlDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet connectioncompletion timeout ATS7=[<tmo>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATS7? <tmo>Show if the commandis supported ATS7=? S7: (list of supported<tmo>s)<tmo> Description50 Timeout value in seconds. Default value1-255 Timeout value in secondsDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet Comma DialModifier Delay Control ATS8=[<dly>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting. ATS8? <dly>Show if the commandis supported. ATS8=? S8: (list of supported<dly>s)<dly> Description2Thevalueofthedialmodifierdelayinseconds.Default value1-255 Thevalueofthedialmodifierdelayinseconds
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL100 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay ControlSpecifies the amount of time that the DCE will remain connected to theline after the absence of received line signals.3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call MonitoringThis command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function inthe ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informsabout call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc.It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with resultcode *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this istwo fold:• to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE;Description Command Possible ResponsesSet AutomaticDisconnect DelayControlATS10=[<val>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATS10? <val>Show if the commandis supported ATS10=? S10: (list of supported<val>s)<val> Description2Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value1-254 Number of tenths of a second of delayDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet Call Monitoring onor off AT*ECAM=<onoff> •OK•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the current statusfor Call Monitoring AT*ECAM? •*ECAM:<onoff>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ECAM=? •*ECAM:listofsupported <onoff>s•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR
3. CONTROL AND STATUS101LZT 123 7263 R1A• to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for anongoing call.<onoff> Description0The call log function is disabled (off)1The call log function is enabled (on)<ccid> DescriptionInteger (1-7) A number which uniquely defines a call in the phone (=number of call control process). There can not be two callid’s with the same number simultaneously. The maximumnumber of call control processes is 7, 5 multipartymembers,onecallonholdandonewaitingcall<ccstatus> Description0IDLE1CALLING (MO)2CONNECTING (MO)3ACTIVE (connection between A and B)4HOLD5WAITING (MT)6ALERTING (MT)7BUSY<calltype> Description1VOICE2DATA4FAX128 VOICE2<processid> DescriptionInteger Reported when returning to the IDLE state (<ccstatus> =0).8=H’08=CC(Callcontrol)68 =H’44 = MM (Mobile Management)69 = H’45 = MS (Mobile Station)122 = H’7A = RR (Radio Resources)<exit cause> DescriptionInteger Exit cause according to GSM 04.08. Reported whenreturning to IDLE state (<ccstatus> = 0)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL102 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.12 AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving TimeThis command sets the daylight saving time hours.Note! This command affects the MS clock set with the AT+CCLK command.To avoid confusion it is recommended the daylight saving time (DST)is set with this command before setting the actual local time withAT+CCLK.<number> DescriptionString String type phone number of format specified by <type>.Only valid for <ccstatus> = 1 (CALLING)<type> DescriptionInteger Type of address octet in integer format (refer GSM 04.08subclause 10.5.4.7). ; default 145 when dialing stringincludes international access code character “+”,otherwise 129. Only valid for <ccstatus> = 1 (CALLING)Description Command Possible ResponsesSet Daylight SavingTime AT*EDST=<dst> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead current DaylightSaving Time AT*EDST? •*EDST:<dst>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EDST=? •• *EDST: (list ofsupported <dst>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<dst> Description0Standard time1Daylight saving time, +1 hour2Daylight saving time, +2 hours
3. CONTROL AND STATUS103LZT 123 7263 R1A3.13 AT*EMAR Ericsson Master ResetThis command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in theMS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks theMS.3.14 AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin EventThe command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has beeninserted and accepted.Description Command Possible ResponsesPerform a master resetin the MS AT*EMAR •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShows if the commandis supported or not AT*EMAR=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequests the MS toinform when the PINcode has beeninsertedAT*EPEE=<onoff> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*EPEE=? • *EPEE: (list ofsupported <onoff>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the current statusfor PIN Code Request AT*EPEE? • *EPEE: <onoff>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<onoff> Description0Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated(off)1Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated (on)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL104 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.15 AT*ESMM Ericsson Settings Minute MinderThis command sets the minute minder setting to on or off in the MS.Test command returns the <mode> value.3.16 AT+CALA Set AlarmSets an alarm time in the ME. The alarm time is set in minutes andhours. Date, seconds and time zone cannot be set.The alarm must be set again by the user after it has been released. It willnot ring automatically every day at the same time.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets the Minute Minderto on or off AT*ESMM=<mode> •+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*ESMM? •*ESMM:<mode>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported or not andthe possible settingsAT*ESMM=? •*ESMM:listofsupported <mode>s•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0OFF, minute minder off. Default setting1ON, minute minder onDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet an alarm time inthe ME AT+CALA=<time> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORList current activealarm settings in ME AT+CALA? •+CALA:<time>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow list of supportedparameter values AT+CALA=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR
3. CONTROL AND STATUS105LZT 123 7263 R1AThe alarm function uses the ring type and the ring level defined with theAT*ERIN and AT*ERIL commands.3.17 AT+CALD Alarm DeleteThis command removes an active alarm.3.18 AT+CAPD Postpone or Dismiss an AlarmThis command controls an active (occurring) alarm by eitherpostponing it or dismissing it.If more than one alarm occurs at the same time, this command dismissesor postpones the last activated alarm.<time> Descriptionstring typevalue Refer to AT+CCLK command. Only minutes and hours areusedDescription Command Possible ResponsesDelete an alarm AT+CALD=<n> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CALD=? •+CALD:(listofsupported <n>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<n> DescriptionInteger type Index identifying an active alarmDescription Command Possible ResponsesPostpone or dismiss analarm AT+CAPD=[<sec>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CAPD=? •+CAPD:(listofsupported <sec>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<sec> Description0Dismiss the alarm1…600 Postpone the alarm (snooze) for <sec> seconds. Notsupported540 Postpone the alarm (snooze) for 540 seconds (9 minutes).This is the only supported value
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL106 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.19 AT+CCLK Set Clock and DateSets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CMEERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current settingof the clock.3.20 AT+CEER Extended Error ReportCauses the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>.Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failureinformation given by the GSM network in text format.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet the real time clockof the ME AT+CCLK=<time> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting AT+CCLK? •+CCLK:<time>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CCLK=? •OK•ERROR<time> Descriptionstring typevalue Format is “yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where charactersindicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes,seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local timeand GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00GMT+2 hours reads “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”NOTE: If the ME does not support time zone informationthen the three last characters of <time> are not returnedby +CCLK?Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest an ExtendedError Report AT+CEER • +CEER: <report>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CEER=? •OK•ERROR<report> Descriptioncharacters The total number of characters, including line terminators,in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters.Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>
3. CONTROL AND STATUS107LZT 123 7263 R1A3.21 AT+CFUN Set Phone FunctionalitySelects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS. Level “fullfunctionality” results in the highest level of power drawn. “Minimumfunctionality” resultsin the minimum power drawn. Manufacturers mayalso specify levels of functionality between these two end levels. Whensupported by manufacturers, ME resetting with the <rst> parametermay be utilized.Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound.Note! ‘AT+CFUN=’ is interpreted as ‘AT+CFUN=0’.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet MS functionality AT+CFUN=[<fun>[,<rst>]] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OKShow the currentsetting AT+CFUN? •+CFUN:<fun>•+CMEERROR:<err>Show if thecommand issupportedAT+CFUN=? • +CFUN: (list ofsupported <fun>s),(list of supported<rst>s)•+CME ERROR: <err><fun> Description0Minimum functionality. Default value.Note: The ME is turned off1Full functionality.Note: If previously turned off, the phone is turned on4Disable MS transmit and receive RF circuitsNot Supported<rst> Description0Do not reset1Reset the MS before setting it to <fun> power level
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL108 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.22 AT+CIND Indicator ControlUsed to set the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that theindicator is off (or in state which can be identified as “off” state), 1means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than“off” state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is asimple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The number ofelements is ME specific. If the ME does not allow setting of indicatorsor it is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If acertain indicator is not writable, it cannot be set. If the parameter is anempty field, the indicator will keep the previous value.Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum16 character description of the indicator and compound value is theallowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable,+CME ERROR: <err> is returned.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet IndicatorControl AT+CIND=[<ind>[,<ind>[,…]]] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+CIND? • +CIND: <ind>,<ind>,…•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT+CIND=? • +CIND: (<descr>,(list ofsupported <ind>s)),(<descr>,(list of supported<ind>s)),…•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<ind> DescriptionInteger type Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr><descr> Description“battchg” Battery charge level (0-5) Not supported“signal” Signal quality (0-5)“battery warning” Battery warning (0-1) Not supported“charger connected” Charger connected (0-1) Not supported“service” Service availability (0-1)(Net contact status, 1 = Net contact)“sounder” Sounder activity (0-1)(ME silent status, 1 = ME silent)“message” Message received (0-1)
3. CONTROL AND STATUS109LZT 123 7263 R1A3.23 AT+CLAC List all available AT CommandsCauses the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands.Note! This command only returns the AT commands that are available to theuser.3.24 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment ErrorDisables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as anindication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. Whenenabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final resultcode instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR isreturned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, orTA functionality.“call” Call in progress (0-1)“vox” Transmit activated by voice activity (0-1).Not supported“roam” Roaming indicator (0-1)(Home net status, 0 = Home Net)“sms full” A short message memory storage in the MT hasbecome full (1), or memory locations areavailable(0);i.e.therangeis(0-1)<descr> DescriptionCommand Possible Responses+CLAC <ATCommand1>[<CR><LF><ATCommand2>[…]]+CME ERROR: <err>+CLAC=? +CME ERROR: <err>Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest GSM MobileEquipment ErrorControlAT+CMEE=[<n>] •OK•ERRORRead the command AT+CMEE? • +CMEE: <n>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMEE=? • +CMEE: (list ofsupported <n>s)•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL110 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.25 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event ReportingEnables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from ME toTE in the case of key pressings, display changes, and indicator statechanges. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codesspecified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on bufferedcodes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered. If the ME does not supportsetting, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.<n> Description0Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERRORinstead. Default value1Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric<err> values (refer next subclause)2Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose<err> values (refer next subclause)Description Command Possible ResponsesSet phoneactivity status AT+CMER=[<mode>[,<keyp>[,<disp>[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead thecurrent setting AT+CMER? •+CMER:<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT+CMER=? • +CMER: (list of supported<mode>s), (list of supported<keyp>s), (list of supported<disp>s), (list of supported<ind>s), (list of supported<bfr>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result codebuffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other placeor the oldest ones can be discarded1Not Supported2Not Supported3Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TElink specific inband technique used to embed resultcodes and data when TA is in on-line data mode<keyp> Description0No keypad event reporting
3. CONTROL AND STATUS111LZT 123 7263 R1A3.26 AT+CPAS Phone Activity StatusReturns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogatethe ME before requesting action from the phone.When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, thecommand returns <pas>-values from 0 to 128 (for supported values setable 1 below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed withthe <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Ericssonspecific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see thetable below).<disp> Description0No display event reporting<ind> Description0No indicator event reporting1Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:<ind>,<value>.<ind> indicates the indicator order number(asspecifiedfor+CIND)and<value>isthenewvalueofindicator. Only those indicator events, which are notcaused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE2Not Supported<bfr> Description0TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within thiscommand is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered1TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within thiscommand is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1...3 isentered (OK response shall be given before flushing thecodes). Not SupportedDescription Command Possible ResponsesExecute Phone ActivityStatus AT+CPAS[=<mode>] •+CPAS:<pas>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CPAS=? •+CPAS:(list of supported<pas>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL112 LZT 123 7263 R1ATest command returns values supported by the ME as a compoundvalue, refer GSM 07.07.<pas> Description0Ready (ME allows commands from TA/TE)1Unavailable (ME does not allow commands from TA/TE).Not Supported2Unknown (ME is not guaranteed to respond toinstructions). Not Supported3Ringing (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but theringer is active)4Call in progress (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, butacallisinprogress)5Asleep (ME is unable to process commands from TA/TEbecause it is in a low functionality state). Not Supported6..127 All other values below 128 are reserved by ETS. NotSupported129 MMI is in idle state, (operator name/clock/date). This stateis a sub-state to ‘ready’ (0) and has the followingdefinition:MMIinIdlestate,thatis,operator,clockanddate(isset)shown on the displayNo conversation or data call in progressNo sub-menus shown on the display4 Only digits, clear, *, NO and # allowed in this mode, notchanging mode130 Mobile oriented call in progress. This is a sub-state to ‘callin progress’131 Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to‘call in progress’<mode> Description1Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific <pas> values,such as 129, 130 and 131
3. CONTROL AND STATUS113LZT 123 7263 R1A3.27 AT+CPIN PIN ControlSends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the MEoperational (SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM). If the PIN is to be enteredtwice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request ispending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message(+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE.If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN,<newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM.Note! Commands which interact with the ME that are accepted when the MEhas a pending request for SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM are: +CGMI,+CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, +CFUN, +CMEE +CPIN, L and M.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest PIN Control AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<newpin>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting AT+CPIN? •+CPIN:<code>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CPIN=? •+CMEERROR:<err>• +CPIN: (supported<code>s)•OK•ERROR<pin>,<newpin> Descriptionstring The range for the SIM PIN and the PH- SIM PIN is 4 - 8digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits<code> DescriptionREADY ME is not pending for any passwordSIM PIN ME is waiting SIM PIN to be givenSIM PUK ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL114 LZT 123 7263 R1APH-SIM PIN ME is waiting PHone-to-SIM card password to be givenSIM PIN2 ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given. This <code> isrecommended to be returned only when the lastexecuted command resulted in PIN2 authenticationfailure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not enteredcorrectly after the failure, it is recommended that ME doesnot block its operationSIM PUK2 ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given. This <code> isrecommended to be returned only when the lastexecuted command resulted in PUK2 authenticationfailure (i.e. +CME ERROR:18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are notentered correctly after the failure, it is recommended thatME does not block its operation.BLOCKED The SIM cards is blocked for the user<err> Description0Phone failure5PH-SIM PIN required10 SIM not inserted11 SIM PIN required12 SIM PUK required13 SIM failure14 SIM busy15 SIM wrong16 Incorrect password24 Text string too long25 Invalid characters in text string100 Unknown<code> Description
3. CONTROL AND STATUS115LZT 123 7263 R1A3.28 AT+CPWD Change PasswordSets a new password for the facility lock function defined by commandFacility Lock +CLCK.Test command returns a list of pairs which present the availablefacilities and the maximum length of their password.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest facility lock AT+CPWD=<fac>,<oldpwd>,<newpwd> • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CPWD=? •+CPWD:(<fac1>,<pwdlength1>),(<fac2>,<pwdlength2>),…• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<fac > Description“CS” CNTRL (lock control surface e.g. phone keyboard).Not supported“PS” PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password whenother than current SIM card inserted)“SC” SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-upand when this lock command issued)“P2” SIM PIN2“AO” BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)“OI” BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88clause 1)“AI” BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)“IR” BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside thehome country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)“OX” BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except toHome Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)“NT” barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored to TAmemory. Not supported“NM” barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored to MEmemory. Not supported“NS” barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored to SIMmemory. Not supported“NA” barr incoming calls from numbers Not stored in Anymemory. Not supported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL116 LZT 123 7263 R1A“AB” All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30)“AG” All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)“AC” All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)“FD” SIM fixed dialling memory feature. If PIN2 authenticationhas not been carried out during the current session, PIN2 isrequired as <passwd>). Not supported<oldpwd> Descriptionstring type <oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for thefacility from the ME user interface or with the changepassword command, +CPWD<newpwd> Descriptionstring type <newpwd> is the new password, maximum length ofpassword can be determined with <pwdlength><pwdlength> DescriptionInteger type Maximum length of the password for the facility<err> Description0Phone failure3Operation not allowed5PH-SIM PIN required10 SIM not inserted11 SIM PIN required12 SIM PUK required13 SIM failure14 SIM busy15 SIM wrong16 Incorrect password17 SIM PIN2 required18 SIM PUK2 required23 Text string too long24 Invalid characters in text string100 Unknown101..255 Reserved by ETS<fac > Description
3. CONTROL AND STATUS117LZT 123 7263 R1A3.29 AT+CR Service Reporting ControlEnables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reportsduring the handshake phase.3.30 AT+CRC Cellular Result CodeControls whether or not the extended format of incoming call indicationis used. When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE withunsolicited result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING.Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet Service ReportingControl AT+CR=<mode> •OK•ERRORRead current setting AT+CR? •+CR:<mode>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CR=? •+CR:(listofsupported<mode>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Disable reporting. Default value1Enable reportingDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet Cellular ResultCode option AT+CRC=[<mode>] •OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting AT+CRC? •+CRC:<mode>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CRC=? •+CRC:(listofsupported<mode>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Disables extended format1Enables extended format
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL118 LZT 123 7263 R1A3.31 AT+CSAS Save SettingsSaves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory. A TAcan contain several settings profiles. Settings specified in commandsService Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP andSelect Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) aresaved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. SIMSMS parameters) and therefore can not be saved.Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for readingand writing of settings.3.32 AT+CSQ Signal StrengthReturns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel biterror rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supportedby the TA as compound values.Description Command Possible ResponsesSave Settings AT+CSAS[=<profile>] • +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORGet availableprofiles AT+CSAS=? • +CSAS: (list of supported<profile>s)• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERROR<profile> Description0..255 Manufacturer specific profile number where settings areto be stored. Default is “0”.Description Command Possible ResponsesExecute SignalStrength AT+CSQ •+CSQ:<rssi>,<ber>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CSQ=? •+CSQ:(listofsupported<rssi>s),(list ofsupported <ber>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR
3. CONTROL AND STATUS119LZT 123 7263 R1A3.33 AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone UpdateEnables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ. Ifsetting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR <err> is returned.<rssi> Description0-113dBm or less1-111dBm2..30 -109… –53dBm31 -51dBm or greater99 Notknownornotdetectable<ber> Description0..7 As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 [0] subclause8.2.499 NotknownornotdetectableDescription Command Possible ResponsesEnable and disableautomatic time zoneupdate via NITZAT+CTZU=<onoff> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead current setting AT+CTZU? •+CTZU:<onoff>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CTZU=? •+CTZU:(listofsupported <onoff>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<onoff> Description0The automatic time zone update is disabled (off)1The automatic time zone update is enabled (on)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL120 LZT 123 7263 R1A
121LZT 123 7263 R1A4. AudioNote! *E2EAMS and *E2APR are new commands that replace thefuntionality offered by the *EALR, *EAMS, *EARS and *ELAMcommands. Use the new commands in new applications. The oldcommands are included for compatibility.4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile ModificationThis command allows the modification and configuration of the currentaudio profile. An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely definesthe way in which the audio paths, gains, DSP algorithms and switchsetting are configured. There are several audio profiles available innon-volatile storage, and the current profile can be modified by use ofthe AT*E2APR command.The AT*E2EAMS command allows the user to:Description Command Possible ResponsesRequestoperationwith audioprofileAT*E2EAMS= <op>[,<TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>,][,<val>]]• ERROR•OKDisplay setprofile AT*E2EAMS? • *E2EAMS: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>• ERRORShow if thecommandis supportedAT*E2EAMS=? • *E2EAMS:(list of supported <op>s)• ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL122 LZT 123 7263 R1A• configure the whole profile, specifying each audio parameter in acomma separated list;• set a single parameter, given by its parameter number;• save the current profile to non-volatile memory under the currentprofile number (see AT*E2APR).The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the readcommand AT*E2EAMS?Default audio settings are given in AT*E2APR.Abortability:This command may not be aborted.Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audiocircuit are affected by the various parameters.Figure 4.1 Audio diagram of the CODECAuxInGainMicInGainSideToneGainAux AmpEar AmpTxPGA TxGainLowRxPGA VolumeTxPCMRxPCMSpeechdecoderF/REchoCancelHandsfreeNoiseRedEncoderF/RATMSMICPMICNBEARPBEARNPCMOUTPCMINPCMULDPCMDLDDSPCODECSideToneswitchMicPathswitchesSpkPathswitches
4. AUDIO123LZT 123 7263 R1A<op> Description0Configure current profile (<pr1> to <pr21>)1Set <TxPGA>2Set <RxPGA>3Set <SideToneGain>4Set <AuxInGain>5Set <MicInGain>6Set <TxAGC>7Set <Volume>8Set <MaxVolume>9Set <MicPath>10 Set <SpkPath>11 Set <TxPCM>12 Set <RxPCM>13 Set <HFAlgorithm>14 Set <LocalAudio>15 Set <TxGainLow>16 Set <MicVolt2V>17 Set <SideTone>18 Set <NoiseRed>19 Set <EchoCancel>20 Set <AnalogRing>255 Save current profile to non-volatile storage at currentprofile number<TxPGA>,<RxPGA> Description0-5dB PGA gain1-2.5dB PGA gain20dB PGA gain32.5dB PGA gain
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL124 LZT 123 7263 R1A45dB PGA gain57.5dB PGA gain6-7.5dB PGA gain7-10dB PGA gain<SideToneGain> Description010dB113dB216dB319dB422dB525dB<AuxInputGain> Description0MUTE113dB234dB346dB<MicInputGain> Description0MUTE113dB225dB334dB446dB<TxAGCGain> Description00dB13dB26dB<TxPGA>,<RxPGA> Description
4. AUDIO125LZT 123 7263 R1A<Volume>,<MaxVolume> Description0MUTE1-9 Volume levels 1-9<MicPath>,<SpkPath> Description0OFF1MUTE2Internal (using microphone/speaker)3External (using ATMS/AFMS)<TxPCM>,<RxPCM> Description013bit PCM116bit PCM<HFAlgorithm> Description0No handsfree1Advanced handsfree2Switching handsfree3No handsfree handheld4No handsfree external<LocalAudio> Description0Local audio mode off1Local audio microphone/no speaker2Local audio no microphone/speaker3Local audio microphone/speaker<TxGainLow> Description0Tx gain normal1Tx gain -7dB
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL126 LZT 123 7263 R1AExamplesAT*E2EAMS=?*E2EAMS=(0-21,255)OKCurrent default profile is 0:AT*E2EAMS?*E2EAMS: 2,2,3,2,3,2,5,9,3,3,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1OKSets current profile with these settings:AT*E2EAMS=0,2,1,2,0,0,2,5,9,2,2,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1OKSets TxPGA gain to 0dB:AT*E2EAMS=1,2OKTurns analog ringing off:AT*E2EAMS=20,0OKSave current profile to currently loaded profile in non-volatile memory:AT*E2EAMS=255OK<MicVolt2V> Description0Microphone voltage at 2.5V1Microphone voltage at 2V<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>Description0OFF1ON
4. AUDIO127LZT 123 7263 R1A4.2 AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile ManipulationThis command allows the maniuplation and storage of the audio“profiles” stored in the MS. The requirement for the 2nd and 3rdparameters depend on the operation being carried out.Using the command you can:• Set one of the three audio profiles 0, 1 or 2 as the current profile.This will load the profile's settings from NVM and implement them.• Read one of the audio profiles. The current settings for the profilenumber defined will be displayed.• Copy all parameters from one profile into another.• Reset any of the profiles. This will reinstate the factory defaults forthe profile:- 0 is the handset profile,- 1 is the portable handsfree profile,- 2 is the car kit profile.• Set a profile as the default profile on next power up.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest operationwith audio profile AT*E2APR=<op>[,<prnum1>[,<prnum2>]]• ERROR•OK• *E2APR: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>•OKDisplay currentlyset profile AT*E2APR? • *E2APR: current <prnum>•ERRORShows if thecommand issupportedAT*E2APR=? •*E2APR:(listofsupported<op>s), (list of supported<prnum1>s), (list of supported<prnum2>s)• ERROR<op> Description0Set profile <prnum1> to set as current1Read profile <prnum1> settings2Copy profile <prnum1> to <prnum2>3Reset profile <prnum1> to factory default4Set default profile as <prnum1>. Will store this as defautlprofile in NVM, and use it as default from next power on
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL128 LZT 123 7263 R1AExamplesAT*E2APR=?*E2APR= (0-4),(0-2),(0-2)OKCurrent default profile is profile 0:AT*E2APR?*E2APR: 0OKSet audio profile now used to profile 1:AT*E2APR=0,1OKAudio profile 1 settings:AT*E2APR=1,1*E2APR: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0OKCopy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2:AT*E2APR=2,1,2OKReset audio profile 1 with factory default - this also resets the currentaudio paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used:AT*E2APR=3,1OKSets profile number 1 as the default when module is powered on:AT*E2APR=4,1OK<prnum1>,<prnum2> Description0Profile 0 (Factory profile set for handset). Default1Profile 1 (Factory profile set for portable handsfree)2Profile 2 (Factory profile set for car kit)
4. AUDIO129LZT 123 7263 R1A4.3 AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line RequestThe AT*EALR command is used by accessories to request the ATMSand AFMS. The command includes two parameters; <mode> and<activation>. The <mode> parameter sets which audio lines arerequested and the <activation> parameter is used to indicate if theaccessory wants to be activated directly or not. Direct activation meansthe accessory gets the audio lines immediately if a call is establishedfrom the MS (i.e. keypad, voice recognition). If the accessory doesn'trequest direct activation, it has to indicate to the MS when it wants toget the audio lines (e.g. using AT commands).The <audio status> parameter is used to demand the audio lines.This command enables the unsolicited result code*EALV:<mode>,<activation>,<resp> which is sent to the applicationwhen the module wants it to change audio state.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest the audio lines(ATMS,AFMS) AT*EALR=<mode>[,<activation>[,<aud_status>]]•*EALR:<mode>,<activation>,<resp>•OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting AT*EALR? *EALR:<mode>,<activation>,<resp>Show list of supportedparameters AT*EALR=? *EALR:(list of supported<mode>s,<activation>s and<aud_status>sparameters)<mode > Description0No request for ATMS or AFMS1Request ATMS and not AFMS2RequestAFMSandnotATMS3Request ATMS and AFMS<activation > Description0Not direct activated audio accessory (e.g. cordlessportable hands free)1Direct activated audio accessory (e.g. vehicle handsfree)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL130 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.4 AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode SelectionSet the Audio mode selection.The command must be sent to the MS at the initialization of an audioaccessory, but can also be sent later to change the audio mode selection.The command includes the following parameters:• <internal_voice_alg> sets the voice-processing mode in the phone.<aud_status > Description0No change of the audio status1Audio hand over. Accessory hands over control of boththe audio lines and the call to the phone2Audio demand. Accessory demands control of both theaudio lines and the call<resp > Description0Disable ATMS and AFMS1Enable ATMS and disable AFMS2Disable ATMS and enable AFMS3Enable ATMS and AFMSDescription Command Possible ResponsesSetstheaudiomode for theapplicationAT*EAMS=<internal_voice_alg>[,<noise_reduction>[,<side tone>[,<short_echo_canceling>[,<ATMS_gain>[,<class>[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>]]]]]]]•OK•ERRORShow thecurrent audiomode settingAT*EAMS? *EAMS:<internal_voice_alg>, <noise_reduction>,<side_tone>,<short_echo_canceling>,<AFMS_gain>,<class>,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>Show list ofsupportedservicesAT*EAMS=? *EAMS: (list of supported<internal_voice_alg >s,<noise_reduction>s,<side_tone>s,<short_echo_canceling>s,<AFMS_gain>s>,<class>s,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>s,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>s)
4. AUDIO131LZT 123 7263 R1A• <noise_reduction> sets the noise reduction functionality in thephone.• <side tone> activates the side tone functionality in the phone.• <short_echo_canceling> sets the short echo canceling functionalityin the phone.• <ATMS_gain> indicates the gain of the signal that is sent to thephone.• <class> indicates the Hands Free class. The class parameter is usedto fine adjust some parameters in the internal voice algorithm.• <ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class> indicates the ATMSsensitivity deviation from a given class. This parameter is used, forexample if an HF product of a certain class has a new microphonethat is more sensitive than the old one.• <AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class> indicates the AFMSsensitivity deviation from a given class. This parameter is used, forexample if an HF product of a certain class has a new speaker that ismore sensitive than the old one.Note! The last three parameters in this command (i.e. <class>,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>) are included to give theinternal voice algorithm additional information to perform optimally. Itis up to the MS to decide how this additional information is used.<internal_voice_alg> Description0None1Semi Duplex2Full Duplex(Note! the internal hands free algorithm in theMS contains echo cancelling)<noise_reduction> Description0Off1On<side_tone> Description0Off1On<short_echo_canceling> Description0Off1On
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL132 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.5 AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring SignalUsed to enable an analogue ring signal as indication of an incoming callin an external loudspeaker (AFMS). The <mode> parameter activatesand deactivates the service.<ATMS_gain> Description0Normal (0 dB) (internal voice processing)112 dB from accessory (external voiceprocessing). Not supported<Class> Description0None1Low end, class reference Hector2Mid End, class reference Scott3High End, class reference Hasse4Large room, class reference Office Hands free. Notsupported<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class> Description00dB12,5 dB2-2,5 dB35,0 dB4-5,0 dBDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest analogue ringsignal in the loudspeaker AT*EARS=<mode> •OK•ERRORShow the current modesetting AT*EARS? *EARS: <mode>Show list of supportedmodes AT*EARS=? *EARS: (list ofsupported <mode>s)<mode > Description0Disable analogue ring signal1Enable analogue ring signal
4. AUDIO133LZT 123 7263 R1A4.6 AT*E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense EnableThis command allows the user to set the functionality for a PHF(portable handsfree) button, as used on simple handsfree equipment.When set to ON, the MS will detect the shortcircuit of the ATMS andAFMS lines, and interpret this as a PHF button press. This has the effectof answering/hanging up a call without recourse to AT commands.4.7 AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio ModeUsed to route the microphone and/or the loudspeaker signal to thesystem bus. This function is used when the audio information is to becommunicated over the system bus rather than the GSM radio. Thisfunctionality can be used by an MC link accessory that communicateswith a PSTN adapter.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet PHF functionality AT*E2PHFB=<op> •ERROR•OKDisplay current setting AT*E2PHFB? *E2PHFB: <op>Show if the commandis supported AT*E2PHFB=? •*E2PHFB:(listofsupported <op>s•ERROR<op> Description0Disable PHF button. Default setting1Enable PHF buttonDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet local audio mode AT*ELAM=<mic>[,<loudspeaker>] •*ELAM:<mic>,<loudspeaker>•OK•ERRORShow the currentservice setting AT*ELAM? *ELAM:<mic>,<loudspeaker>Show list of supportedparameters AT*ELAM=? *ELAM: (list ofsupported <mic>s and<loudspeaker>sparameters)<mic> Description0Off1Microphone analogue2Microphone digital. Not supported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL134 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.8 AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone ModeThe command enables/disables the microphone in the module. Themicrophone should be enabled for each new call, even if it was disabledfor the previous call.4.9 AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication RequestThis command is used to request music mute indications.<loudspeaker> Description0Off1Loudspeaker analogue2Loudspeaker digital. Not supportedDescription Command Possible ResponsesEnables/disables thephone microphone AT*EMIC=<mode> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported, showsupported valuesAT*EMIC=? •*EMIC:(listofsupported<mode>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsettings AT*EMIC? •*EMIC:<mode>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Microphone is disabled (off)1Microphone is enabled (on)Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest for muteindications AT*EMIR=<mode> •OK•ERRORShow supportedmessage types alongwith the current servicesettingAT*EMIR? *EMIR: <mode>,<resp>Show list of supportedservices AT*EMIR=? *EMIR: (list ofsupported<mode>s)
4. AUDIO135LZT 123 7263 R1AA music mute indication is sent to all accessories that have requested theindication when an incoming event (a phone call, an SMS, an e-mailetc.), with an associated audio prompt (beep, melody, etc.), is receivedby the phone or an internal event such as a calendar event, with anassociated audio prompt occurs.The music mute indication is also sent out when the voice recognitionmechanism is activated. The only exception to this is when the MagicWord function is active, as the ASR is then capable of recognising a(predefined) keyword despite background noise.After the event (when the call has been disconnected, the “new mail”signal has sounded etc.), or when the voice recognition mechanism isdeactivated, a new music mute indication with the <resp> parameter setto zero is sent.Note! The phone shall send the system sound that corresponds to the incomingevent (phone conversation, “new mail” signal etc.) over the system bus.<mode > Description0Off, music mute indication result codes will not be sent tothe accessory1On, music mute indication result codes will be sent to theaccessory<resp > Description0Music mute inactive1Music mute active
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL136 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.10 AT*EPRR Ericsson Personal Ring Type ReadReturns phone number, phone number type and sound type in locationnumber <indexr>. If listing fails an error, +CME ERROR: <err>, isreturned.Description Command Possible ResponsesRead phone numberand ring type AT*EPRR=<indexr> •*EPRR:<indexr>,<number>,<type>,<soundtype>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EPRR=? •*EPRR:(listofsupported<indexr>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<indexr> Description1-50 Value of location number<number> Descriptionstring type Phone number of format <type><type> Descriptioninteger format Type of address octet(refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7)128 Unknown numbering plan, national / international numberunknown129 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national / internationalunknown145 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, international number161 ISDN / telephony numbering plan, national number128 - 255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7<sound type> Description0Off. Not supported1Low ring signal2Medium ring signal3High ring signal4Mixed ring signal
4. AUDIO137LZT 123 7263 R1A4.11 AT*EPRW Ericsson Personal Ringtype WriteWrites phone number, phone number type and sound type in locationnumber <indexr>. It is possible to use wild cards for phone number bysubstituting the digits with question marks. If writing fails an error,+CME ERROR: <err>, is returned.If all parameters but <indexr> are omitted, the personal ring type atposition <indexr> will be deleted.5Beep. Not supported6Alarm. Not supported7Calendar Tone. Not supported8Calendar Click. Not supported9-10 Reserved. Not supported11 Melody 112-20 Melody 2. Melody 10 reserved for pre-set melodies21-30 Reserved for melody 11-20. Not supported31-38 Own melody 1-839-50 Reserved for own melodies. Not supported<sound type> DescriptionDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest PersonalRingtype WritecommandAT*EPRW=<indexr>,<number>,[<type>],<soundtype>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EPRW=? •*EPRW:(listofsupported<indexr>s),<nlength>,(list of supported<type>s),(list ofsupported <soundtype>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<indexr> Description1-50 Value of location number. The location number must befree. If the given location number is not free, ERROR isreturned<number> Descriptionstring type phone number of format <type>
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL138 LZT 123 7263 R1A<type> DescriptionIntegerformat Type of address octet(refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7)128 Unknown numbering plan, national/international numberunknown129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/internationalnumber unknown145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7<nlength> Descriptioninteger type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number><sound type> Description0Off. Not supported1Low ring signal2Medium ring signal3High ring signal4Mixed ring signal5Beep. Not supported6Alarm. Not supported7Calendar Tone. Not supported8Calendar Click. Not supported9-10 Reserved. Not supported11 Melody 112-30 Melody 2. Melody 20 reserved for pre-set melodies31-38 Own melody 1-839-50 Reserved for own melodies. Not supported
4. AUDIO139LZT 123 7263 R1A4.12 AT*ERIL Ericsson Ring Level SetUsed to set the volume for the ring signals used for incoming voice,Line 1, Line 2, fax and data calls. The parameter <place> controls thering level set for different types of modes. The signal volume isspecified as “step”, with an increasing volume for each signal, or as aselected level.Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets ring volume for thering signals used forincoming voice (L1and L2), fax and datacallsAT*ERIL=<volume>[,<call type>[,<place>]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the settings ofvolume for the ringsignalsAT*ERIL? •*ERIL:<volume1>[,<calltype1> [,<place1>[<CR><LF>…*ERIL:<volume n>[, <calltype n> [,<placen>]]]]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ERIL=? •*ERIL:(listofsupported<volume>s)[,(list ofsupported <calltype>s)[,(list of supported<place>s)]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<volume> Description0Off1-6 Volume setting, not increasing ring129-134 Volume setting, increasing ring<calltype> Description1Line 12Line 23Fax4Data5Alarm. Not supported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL140 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.13 AT*ERIN Ericsson Ring SetUsed to set sound for incoming voice, line L1 and L2, fax, data calls andalarm. For each of the incoming call types and alarm: voice on line 1,voice on line 2, fax calls and data calls and alarm a sound type isselected.The type of sound is either a ring signal, selected from a predefined set,a melody, selected from a predefined set, or an own melody, selectedfrom a set specified by the user.Line 1 is the default for <call type> if the parameter is not given.<place> Description0Hand held1Car mountedDescription Command Possible ResponsesSets ring type forincoming voice (L1and L2), fax and datacalls and alarmAT*ERIN=<sound type>,[<call type>]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the settings ofring type and volumefor the call typesAT*ERIN? •*ERIN:<soundtype1>,<call type1>[<CR><LF>…*ERIN:<sound typen>,<call type n>]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ERIN=? •*ERIN:listofsupported <soundtype>s, list ofsupported <calltype>s•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<call type> Description1Line 12Line 23Fax4Data5Alarm
4. AUDIO141LZT 123 7263 R1A4.14 AT*ERIP Ericsson Ring Signal Playback CommandUsed to play one of the sound types which are available as ring signals/message signals on the module. The signal volume may not be chosenas “step”; with an increasing volume for each signal. If value 1 is chosenfor parameter <volume>, nothing should happen. Signal volume may bechosen as a selected level.Refer to the AT*ERIN command for the <sound type> parameter.<sound type> Description0Off. Not supported1Low ring signal2Medium ring signal3High ring signal4Mixed ring signal5Beep. Not supported6Alarm. Not supported7Calendar Tone. Not supported8Calendar Click. Not supported9-10 Reserved. Not supported11-20 Melody 1. Melody 10 reserved for preset melodies21-30 Reserved. Not supported31-38 Own melodies 1-839-5 Reserved for own melodies. Not supportedDescription Command Possible ResponsesPlays the selectedsound type atspecified volume levelAT*ERIP =<volume>,<soundtype>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ERIP=? •*ERIP:(listofsupported<volume>s),(list ofsupported <soundtype>s)•OK•ERROR<volume> Description0Off1Step. Not Supported2-n Volume setting
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL142 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.15 AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound4.16 AT*ESOM Ericsson Settings Own MelodySets the user defined own melodies in the MS. The <prefix> and <tone>indicates together the tone frequency and duration. The <pause> sets apause between tones.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets the answer modesettings in the MS AT*ESAM=<mode> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*ESAM? •*ESAM:<mode>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ESAM=? •*ESAM:listofsupported <mode>s•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<mode > Description0Answer mode is not set to “Any key”, or “Auto” (off)1Any Key mode on2Auto mode onDescription Command Possible ResponsesSets the ownmelodies in theMSAT*ESOM=[<melody index>],<melody string>•+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShows thecurrent settings,i.e. the currentlystored melodiesAT*ESOM? • *ESOM: <melody index>,<melody string 1>, <CR><LF>……*ESOM: <melody index>,<melody string n>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShows if thecommand issupportedAT*ESOM=? • *ESOM: (list of supported<melody index>),(list ofsupported <pause>s),(list ofsupported <prefix>s),(list ofsupported <tone>s),<mlength>,<mtones>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR
4. AUDIO143LZT 123 7263 R1ATest command returns the possible values of <melody index>, <pause>,<prefix>, <tone>, <mlength> and <mtones>.<melodyindex> Description1-4 Melody 1 – 4. Default setting: 1<melodystring> Descriptionstring A sequence of <tones> and <pause> entries. The <tones>maybeprecededbyoneortwo<prefix>(s)<pause> DescriptionpPause<prefix> Description#Half tone higher(b) Half tone lower+Oneoctavehigher<tones> Descriptionc,d,e,f,g,a,b Short tonesC,D,E,F,G,A,B Long tones<mtones> Descriptioninteger Indicating the maximum number of tones in a melody<mlength> Descriptioninteger Indicating the maximum length of <melody string>
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL144 LZT 123 7263 R1A4.17 AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume ControlUsed to set or query whether an external accessory such as the vehiclehandsfree controls the audio volume.By default, the <external volume> is turned off, i.e. the volume overAFMS is controlled by the phone MMI.The set command is effective only as long as the phone senses that it isconnected to an external accessory that has issued the command. Oncethe phone and the accessory are disconnected the <external volume>setting returns to default.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets the maximumvolume level on theaudio linesAT*EXVC=<externalvolume> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported and showthe possible reportsettingsAT*EXVC=? •*EXVC:(listofsupported <externalvolume>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*EXVC? •*EXVC:<externalvolume>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<externalvolume> Description0The phone MMI controls audio volume over AFMS1Audio volume over AFMS is output at maximum level thatis no clipping occurs. An external accessory such as avehicle kit controls the actual volume level heard by theuser
4. AUDIO145LZT 123 7263 R1A4.18 ATM Monitor Speaker ControlDefine the activity of the speaker. This command is ignored by themodem and is only included for compatibility.Description Syntax Possible ResponsesSet monitor speakercontrol ATM[=][<speaker>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATM? M: <speaker>Show if the commandis supported ATM=? M: (list of supported<speaker>s)<speaker> Description0Off during the entire call. Default value1-3 Different “on” modes
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL146 LZT 123 7263 R1A
147LZT 123 7263 R1A5. Data - CSD/HSCSD5.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service TypeSelects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and theconnection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated.Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup,especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls.Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.Description Command Possible ResponsesSelect bearer servicetype AT+CBST=[<speed>,[<name>,[<ce>]]] •OK•ERRORRead the command AT+CBST? •+CBST:<speed>,<name>,<ce>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CBST=? •+CBST:(listofsupported<speed>s,list ofsupported<name>s,list of supported<ce>s)•OK•ERROR<speed> Description0Auto selection of baud rate42400bps V.22bis64800bps V.3279600bps V.3212 9600bps V.3414 14400bps V.3415 19200bps V.3416 28800bps V.3468 2400bps V.110 (ISDN)70 4800bps V.110 (ISDN)71 9600bps V.110 (ISDN)75 14400bps V.110 (ISDN)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL148 LZT 123 7263 R1A79 19200bps V.110 (ISDN)80 28800bps V.110 (ISDN)81 38400bps V.110 (ISDN)82 48000bps V.110 (ISDN)83 56000bps V.110 (ISDN)<name> Description0Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1kHz modem)1Data circuit synchronous (UDI or 3.1kHz modem).Notsupported2PAD Access (Asynchronous) (UDI). Not supported3Packet access (synchronous) (UDI). Not supported4Data circuit asynchronous (RDI). Not supported5Data circuit synchronous (RDI). Not supported6PAD Access (Asynchronous) (RDI). Not supported7Packet access (synchronous) (RDI). Not supported<ce> Description0transparent. Not supported1Non transparent2Both, transparent preferred. Not supported3Both, non-transparent preferred. Not supported<speed> Description
5. DATA - CSD/HSCSD149LZT 123 7263 R1A5.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link ProtocolRadio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent datacalls are originated may be altered with this command. Availablecommand subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented bythe device (e.g. <ver> may not be available if device supports onlyversions 0 and 1).Note! If radio link protocol is not used, but some other error correctingprotocol (for transparent data calls), V.25ter [4] Error Control Selectiontest command +ES=? may be used to indicate the presence of theprotocol.Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version<verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx>are returned.Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue. If ME/TA supports several RLP versions <verx>, the RLPparameter value ranges for each <verx> are returned in a separate line.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet radio linkprotocol AT+CRLP=[<iws>[,<mws>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<ver>[, <T4>]]]]]]•OK•ERRORRead thecommand AT+CRLP? •+CRLP:<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver1>[,<T4>]][<CR><LF>•+CRLP:<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver2>[,<T4>]][...]]•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT+CRLP=? • +CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),(list of supported <mws>s),(list of supported <T1>s),(list of supported<N2>s)[,<ver1>[,(list of supported <T4>s)]][<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list ofsupported <iws>s), (list ofsupported <mws>s), (list ofsupported <T1>s), (list ofsupported <N2>s)[,<ver2>[,(listofsupported <T4>s)]][...]]•OK•ERROR<iws> Description1200 - 496 IWF to MS window size
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL150 LZT 123 7263 R1A<mws> Description1200 - 496 MS to IWF window size<T1> Description4838 - 100 Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms)<N2> Description60 - 255 Re-transmission attempts N2<T4> Description53 - 255 Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms)<ver> DescriptionInteger RLP version. When version indication is not present,<ver>=0 is assumed
151LZT 123 7263 R1A6. Data - GPRS6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or DeactivateUsed to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s).After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 commandstate. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignoredand OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERRORor +CME: ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRSservice when the activation form of the command is executed, the MSfirst performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specificcontexts.If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activatesall defined contexts.If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the commanddeactivates all active contexts.Description Command Possible ResponsesActivate or deactivatethe specified PDPcontext(s)+CGACT=[<state>[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the command +CGACT? • +CGACT: <cid>,<state>[<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>,<state>[...]]•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported +CGACT=? •+CGACT:(listofsupported <state>s)•OK•ERROR<state> Description0PDP context activation deactivated1PDP context activation activated<cid> DescriptionInteger type A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDPcontext definition
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL152 LZT 123 7263 R1A6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or DetachUsed to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packetdomain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains inV.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, thecommand is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requestedstate cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response isreturned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command)are listed in subclause 1.2.3.Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when theattachment state changes to detached.Note! This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action andparameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to theexecution/set and test forms.Description Command Possible ResponsesAttach or detach MSto the GPRS/packetdomain/packetdomain service+CGATT=[<state>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the command +CGATT? • +CGATT: <state>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported +CGATT=? • +CGATT: (list ofsupported <state>s)•OK•ERROR<state> Description0Detached1Attached
6. DATA - GPRS153LZT 123 7263 R1A6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data StateCauses the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establishcommunication between the TE and the network using one or moreGPRS/packet domain PDP types. This may include performing aGPRS/packet domain attach and one or more PDP context activations.Description Command Possible ResponsesEstablish GPRS/packetdomain connection +CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid[,cid>[,…]]]] •CONNECT•ERROR•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported +CGDATA=? •+CGDATA:(listofsupported <L2P>s)•OK•ERROR<L2P> DescriptionPPP Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IPM-xxxx Manufacturer specific protocol (xxx is an alphanumericstring)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL154 LZT 123 7263 R1A6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP ContextSpecifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified bythe (local) context identification parameter, <cid>.Description Command Possible ResponsesSelect PDPcontextparameters+CGDCONT=[<cid>[,<PDP_type> [,<APN>[,<PDP_addr>[,<d_comp>[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]]]]]]]• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERRORRead thecommand +CGDCONT? • +CGDCONT: <cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]][<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:<cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]][...]]•OK• ERRORTest if thecommand issupported+CGDCONT=? •+CGDCONT:(rangeofsupported <cid>s),<PDP_type>,,,(list ofsupported <d_comp>s),(list of supported <h_comp>s)[,(list of supported <pd1>s)[,…[,(list of supported<pdN>s)]]][<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:(range of supported <cid>s),<PDP_type>,,,(list ofsupported <d_comp>s),(list of supported <h_comp>s)[,(list of supported<pd1>s)[,…[,(list of supported<pdN>s)]]] [...]]•OK• ERROR<cid> DescriptionInteger type (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter whichspecifies a particular PDP context definition. Theparameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used inother PDP context-related commands. The range ofpermitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by thetest form of the command1-10 Supported values. Ericsson specific<PDP_type> DescriptionX25 ITU-T/CCITT X.25 layer 3. Not supportedIP Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)OSPIH Internet Hosted Octet Stream Protocol. Not supportedPPP Point to Point Protocol (IETF STD 51). Not supported
6. DATA - GPRS155LZT 123 7263 R1A<APN> DescriptionString type (Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logicalname that is used to select the GGSN or the externalpacket data network. If the value is null or omitted, thenthe subscription value will be requested<PDP_address> DescriptionString type A string parameter that identifies the MS in theaddress space applicable to the PDP. If the value isnull or omitted, then a value may be provided bythe TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failingthat, a dynamic address will be requested<d_comp> Description0PDP data compression OFF1PDP data compression ON2..255 Reserved<h_comp> Description0PDP header compression OFF1PDP header compression ON2..255 Reserved<pdN> DescriptionString type Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specificto the <PDP_type>
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL156 LZT 123 7263 R1A6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event ReportingEnables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:XXX from MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in theGPRS/packet domain MS or the network.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet command +CGEREP=[<mode>[,<bfr>]] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the command +CGEREP? • +CGEREP:<mode>,<bfr>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported +CGEREP=? • +CGEREP: (list ofsupported<mode>s),(list ofsupported <bfr>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS. No codes areforwarded to the TE1Discard unsolicited result codes when MS-TE link isreserved; otherwise forward them directly to the TE<bfr> Description0MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within thiscommand is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered
6. DATA - GPRS157LZT 123 7263 R1A6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP AddressReturns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. Thetest command returns a list of defined <cid>s.Description Command Possible ResponsesShow PDP addressesfor specified CIDs +CGPADDR=[<cid>[,<cid> [,…]]] • +CGPADDR:<cid>,<PDP_addr>[<CR><LF>+CGPADDR:<cid>,<PDP_addr>[...]]•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported +CGPADDR=? • +CGPADDR: (list ofdefined <cid>s)•OK•ERROR<cid> DescriptionInteger type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP contextdefinition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> isspecified, the addresses for all defined contexts arereturned<PDP_address> DescriptionString type A string that identifies the MS in the address spaceapplicable to the PDP. The address may be static ordynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set bythe +CGDCONT and +CGDSCONT commands whenthe context was defined. For a dynamic address it willbe the one assigned during the last PDP contextactivation that used the context definition referred toby <cid>. <PDP_address> is omitted if none is available
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL158 LZT 123 7263 R1A6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which ischecked by the MS against the negotiated profile returned in theActivate PDP Context Accept message.The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the sameparameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMINcommand is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which maybe set to a separate value.A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes theminimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to becomeundefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet minimumacceptableprofile+CGQMIN=[<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay> [,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead thecommand +CGQMIN? •+CGQMIN:<cid>,<precedence>, <delay>,<reliability>, <peak>,<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:<cid>, <precedence>,<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,<mean>[…]]•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupported+CGQMIN=? • +CGQMIN:<PDP_type>,(listofsupported <precedence>s),(list of supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s), (list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported<mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list ofsupported <precedence>s),(list of supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s), (list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported<mean>s)[…]]•OK•ERROR<cid> DescriptionInteger type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP contextdefinition
6. DATA - GPRS159LZT 123 7263 R1A<precedence> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1High priority2Normal priority3Low priority<delay> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1-4 Delay class<reliability> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1-5 Reliability class<peak> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)2Upto2000(16kbits/s)3Upto4000(32kbits/s)4Upto8000(64kbits/s)5Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s)6Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s)7Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s)8Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s)9Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s)<mean> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1Best effort2100 (~0.22 bits/s)3200 (~0.44 bits/s)4500 (~1.11 bits/s)51 000 (~2.2 bits/s)62 000 (~4.4 bits/s)75000(~11.1bits/s)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL160 LZT 123 7263 R1A6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used whenthe MS sends an activate PDP context request message to the network.810 000 (~22 bits/s)920 000 (~44 bits/s)10 50 000 (~111 bits/s)11 100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s)12 200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s)13 500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s)14 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s)15 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s)16 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s)17 10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s)18 20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s)31 50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s)<mean> DescriptionDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet qualityof serviceprofile+CGQREQ=[<cid>[,<precedence>[,<delay>[,<reliability>[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead thecommand +CGQREQ? • +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>,<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:<cid>, <precedence>, <delay>,<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]•OK•ERRORTest if thecommandis supported+CGQREQ=? • +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported <mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),(list of supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),(list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported <mean>s)[…]]•OK•ERROR
6. DATA - GPRS161LZT 123 7263 R1AThe set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the sameparameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQcommand is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which maybe set to a separate value.A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes therequested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.<cid> DescriptionInteger type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP contextdefinition<precedence> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1High priority2Normal priority3Low priority<delay> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1-4 Delay class<reliability> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1-5 Reliability class<peak> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1Up to 1 000 (8 kbits/s)2Up to 2 000 (16 kbits/s)3Up to 4 000 (32 kbits/s)4Up to 8 000 (64 kbits/s)5Up to 16 000 (128 kbits/s)6Up to 32 000 (256 kbits/s)7Up to 64 000 (512 kbits/s)8Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbits/s)9Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbits/s)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL162 LZT 123 7263 R1A<mean> Description0Subscribed (from network) value used1Best effort2100 (~0.22 bits/s)3200 (~0.44 bits/s)4500 (~1.11 bits/s)51 000 (~2.2 bits/s)62 000 (~4.4 bits/s)75 000 (~11.1 bits/s)810 000 (~22 bits/s)920 000 (~44 bits/s)10 50 000 (~111 bits/s)11 100 000 (~0.22 kbits/s)12 200 000 (~0.44 kbits/s)13 500 000 (~1.11 kbits/s)14 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbits/s)15 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbits/s)16 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbits/s)17 10 000 000 (~22 kbits/s)18 20 000 000 (~44 kbits/s)31 50 000 000 (~111 kbits/s)
6. DATA - GPRS163LZT 123 7263 R1A6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration StatusControls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain networkregistration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.Note! If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the+CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registrationstatus and location information for those services.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet command AT+CGREG=[<n>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsettings AT+CGREG? •+CGREG:<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CGREG=? •+CGREG:(listofsupported <n>s)•OK•ERROR<n> Description0Disable network registration unsolicited result code1Enable network registration unsolicited result code2Enable network registration and location informationunsolicited result code<stat> Description0Notregistered,MSisnotsearchingforanewoperatortoregister with1Registered, home network2Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator toregister with3Registration denied4Unknown5Registered, roaming<lac> DescriptionString type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL164 LZT 123 7263 R1A6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS MessagesUsed to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use tosend MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currentlyselected service or service preference.<ci> DescriptionString type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal formatDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet service or servicepreference +CGSMS=[<service>] •OK•ERRORRead the command +CGSMS? • +CGSMS: <service>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported +CGSMS=? • +CGSMS: (list ofavailable<service>s)•OK•ERROR<services> Description0GPRS/packet domain1Circuit switched2GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched ifGPRS/packet domain not available)3Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain ifcircuit switched not available)
165LZT 123 7263 R1A7. Data - HSCSD7.1 AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call ParametersReturns information about the current HSCSD call parameters, i.e. thecurrent number of receive and transmit timeslots, air interface user rateand channel coding.Description Command Possible ResponsesShow current HSCSDcall parameters AT+CHSC • +CHSC:<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if command issupported AT+CHSC=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<rx> Description0NoHSCSDcallisactive.Seealsonotebelow1The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 12The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 23The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 3. Notsupported4The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 4. Notsupported<tx> Description0NoHSCSDcallisactive.Seealsonotebelow1The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 12The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 2. Notsupported3The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 3. Notsupported4The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 4. Notsupported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL166 LZT 123 7263 R1A7.2 AT+CHSD HSCSD Device ParametersShows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME/TA.<aiur> Description0NoHSCSDcallisactive.Seealsonotebelow.1Current air interface user rate is 9.6 kbits/s2Current air interface user rate is 14.4 kbits/s3Current air interface user rate is 19.2 kbits/s4Current air interface user rate is 28.8 kbits/s5Current air interface user rate is 38.4 kbits/s. Not supported6Current air interface user rate is 43.2 kbits/s. Not supported7Current air interface user rate is 57.6 kbits/s. Not supported<coding> Description0No HSCSD call is active. See also note1Current channel coding is 4.8 kbits/s (TCH/F4.8). Notsupported4Current channel coding is 9.6 kbits/s (TCH/F9.6)8Current channel coding is 14.4 kbits/s (TCH/F14.4)Description Command Possible ResponsesShow HSCSD featuressupported by the ME/TAAT+CHSD •+CHSD:<mclass>,<maxRx>,<maxTx>,<sum>,<codings>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if command issupported AT+CHSD=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<mclass> Description2Multislot class is 2<maxRx> Description2Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is 2<maxTx> Description1Maximum number of transmit timeslots that MEcan use is 1
7. DATA - HSCSD167LZT 123 7263 R1A7.3 AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call ConfigurationControls parameters for non-transparent HSCSD calls. Changing<topRx> or <codings> during a call does not affect the current call.Changing <wAiur> or <wRx> affects the current call only if <topRx>was non-zero when the call was established. When using the command<sum> Description3Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that MEcanuseatthesametimeis3(i.e.2+1).Thefollowingapplies in a HSCSD call: 2 (receive slots) + (transmit slots)<sum><codings> Description1Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call is 4.8 kbits/s only.Not supported4Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6 kbits/s only5Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call are both 4.8 kbits/sand9.6kbits/s.Not supported8Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call is 14.4 kbits/s only12 Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call are both 9.6 kbits/sand14.4kbits/sDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet HSCSDconfiguration. Thiscommand is also usedduring a call if new<wAiur> and/or <wRx>are/is desiredAT+CHSN=[<wAiur>[,<wRx>[,<topRx>[,<codings>]]]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow current non-transparent HSCSDsettingAT+CHSN? •+CHSN:<wAiur>,<wRx>, <topRx>,<codings>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if command issupported and showparameter rangesAT+CHSN=? •+CHSN:(listofsupported<wAiur>s), (list ofsupported <wRx>s),(list of supported<topRx>s), (list ofsupported<codings>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL168 LZT 123 7263 R1Ain this way it comes in the “action” command category. This is what isreferred to as user initiated up- and down-grading in GSM 02.34 [4]and GSM 03.34 [7].Note! Recommended value for parameter <speed> in AT+CBST [11] is 0.<wAiur> Description0TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receivetimeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate(<speed> parameter from +CBST command, ref [11]) and<codings>, and <wRx> (or <maxRx> from +CHSDcommand if <wRx>=0) See note below.1Wanted air interface user rate is 9.6 kbit/s2Wanted air interface user rate is 14.4 kbit/s3Wanted air interface user rate is 19.2 kbit/s4Wanted air interface user rate is 28.8 kbit/s5Wanted air interface user rate is 38.4 kbit/s. Not supported6Wanted air interface user rate is 43.2 kbit/s. Not supported7Wanted air interface user rate is 57.6 kbit/s. Not supported<wRx> Description0TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receivetimeslots from currently selected <wAiur> and <codings>Seenotebelow1Wanted number of receive timeslots is 12Wanted number of receive timeslots is 23Wanted number of receive timeslots is 3. Not supported4Wanted number of receive timeslots is 4. Not supported<topRx> Description0Indicates that the user is not going to change <wAiur>and /or <wRx> during the next call1Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request duringthe next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 12Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request duringthe next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 23Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request duringthe next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 3. Notsupported4Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request duringthe next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 4. Notsupported
7. DATA - HSCSD169LZT 123 7263 R1A7.4 AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters ReportSets the HSCSD parameter reporting on or off. If enabled, theintermediate result code +CHSR is activated.<codings> Description1Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call is 4.8 kbit/s only.Not supported4Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6 kbit/s only5Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call are both 4.8 kbit/sand 9.6 kbit/s. Not supported8Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call is 14.4 kbit/s only12 Indicates that the accepted channel codings for the nextestablished non-transparent HSCSD call are both 9.6 kbit/sand 14.4 kbit/sDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet HSCSD parametersreporting on or off AT+CHSR=[<mode>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow current setting AT+CHSR? •+CHSR:<mode>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if command issupported and showparameter rangeAT+CHSR=? •+CHSR: (list ofsupported<modes>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Disable reporting1Enable reporting
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL170 LZT 123 7263 R1A7.5 AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated UpgradingEnables or disables the HSCSD automatic user-initiated upgrade.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet HSCSD automaticuser initiatedupgrading on or offAT+CHSU=[<mode>] •OK•ERRORShow current setting AT+CHSU? •+CHSU=<mode>•OK•ERRORTest if command issupported and showparameter rangeAT+CHSU=? •+CHSU:(listofsupported<modes>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Disable use of UP bit for upgrading1Enable use of UP bit for upgrading
171LZT 123 7263 R1A8. Data - WAP8.1 AT*EWBA Ericsson WAP Bookmark AddThis command adds or deletes a bookmark in the list of bookmarks.To add a bookmark the <bmix> parameter should be set to 0. Thebookmark is always added to the last position of the bookmark list.If the <title> parameter is omitted the bookmark title is set to the first<ntitle> number of characters of the <URL>.If the <URL> parameter exceeds <nURL> number of characters, thebookmark URL is truncated to the last ‘/’ character among the last<nURL> number of characters.To delete a bookmark from the list, the <bmix> parameter should be setto a value greater than 0. The <URL> and the <title> parameters mustbe omitted.Description Command Possible ResponsesAdd or deleteabookmarkinthe list ofbookmarksAT*EWBA=<bmix>[,<URL>[,<title>]] • +CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORList content ofbookmark list AT*EWBA? •*EWBA:<bmix1>,<URL1>,<title1>[<CR><LF>*EWBA:<bmix2>,<URL2>,<title2>[…]]• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupported.AT*EWBA=? • *EWBA: (list of supported<bmix>s),<nURL>,<ntitle>• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERROR<bmix> Description0Add the bookmark to the last position in the list ofbookmarks. This value is only valid for adding bookmarks1Reserved. The index 1 is reserved for the bookmark toEricssonMobileInternetandshouldnotbealteredordeleted2..25 Index to list of bookmarks. These values are only valid fordeleting bookmarks
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL172 LZT 123 7263 R1A8.2 AT*EWBR Ericsson WAP Bookmark ReadThis command reads a bookmark in the bookmark list.<URL> DescriptionString type The URL representing the bookmark<nURL> DescriptionIntegernumber Maximum length of the <URL>-parameter<title> DescriptionString type The title representing the bookmark. If omitted thebookmark title is set equal to the first <ntitle> number ofcharacters of the <URL><ntitle> DescriptionIntegernumber Maximum length of the <title>-parameterDescription Command Possible ResponsesRead bookmark in listof bookmarks AT*EWBR=<bmix> • *EWBR: <URL>,<title>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWBR=? •*EWBR:(listofsupported <bmix>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<bmix> DescriptionInteger type Index to the bookmark in the bookmark list<URL> DescriptionString type The URL representing the bookmark<title> DescriptionString type The title representing the bookmark. If omitted thebookmark title is set equal to the URL
8. DATA - WAP173LZT 123 7263 R1A8.3 AT*EWCG Ericsson WAP CSD GatewaySets the primary and secondary gateways for the WAP browser usedwhen CSD is the preferred bearer. The gateways are either an IP addressor a URL on the network where the gateway can be reached.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet primary andsecondary WAPgatewayAT*EWCG=<primsec>,<gateway> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead primaryand secondaryWAP gatewayAT*EWCG? •*EWCG:<primsec1>,<gateway1>[<CR><LF>*EWCG:<primsec2>,<gateway2>]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT*EWCG=? • *EWCG: (list of supported<primsec>s),<ngateway>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<primsec> Description1Set primary gateway2Set secondary gateway. Not supported<gateway> DescriptionString type Gateway address<ngateway> DescriptionInteger type Maximum length of gateway address
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL174 LZT 123 7263 R1A8.4 AT*EWCT Ericsson WAP Connection TimeoutSets the timeout period used when connecting to a WAP supplier, i.e.the time the WAP browser will wait for a CSD call to be established.8.5 AT*EWDT Ericsson WAP Download TimeoutThis command sets the server response timeout period used whendownloading a WAP page.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet timeout for WAPdownload AT*EWCT=<sec> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead current setting AT*EWCT? •*EWCT:<sec>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWCT=? • *EWCT: (list ofsupported <sec>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<sec> DescriptionInteger type Number of secondsDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet timeout for WAPdownload AT*EWDT=<sec> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead current setting AT*EWDT? •*EWDT:<sec>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWDT=? •*EWDT:(listofsupported <sec>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<sec> DescriptionInteger type Number of seconds
8. DATA - WAP175LZT 123 7263 R1A8.6 AT*EWHP Ericsson WAP HomepageThis command sets the homepage (i.e. the start page) for the WAPbrowser.8.7 AT*EWIL Ericsson WAP Image LoadEnables and disables image download in the WAP browser.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet URL to WAPhomepage AT*EWHP=<URL> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead URL to WAPhomepage AT*EWHP? •*EWHP:<URL>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWHP=? •*EWHP:<nURL>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<URL> DescriptionString type The URL representing the homepage<nURL> DescriptionIntegernumber Maximum length of the <URL>-parameterDescription Command Possible ResponsesEnable and disableimage download inWAP browserAT*EWIL=<onoff> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead setting for imagedownload in WAPbrowserAT*EWIL? •*EWIL:<onoff>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWIL=? •*EWIL:(listofsupported <onoff>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<onoff> Description0Disable image download1Enable image download
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL176 LZT 123 7263 R1A8.8 AT*EWLI Ericsson WAP LoginThis command sets up user identity and password to be used for loggingin to a WAP proxy; i.e. connecting to a WAP service provider.Description Command Possible ResponsesSetup user identity andpassword for WAPproxyAT*EWLI=<user>,<password> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead user identity AT*EWLI? •*EWLI:<user>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWLI=? •*EWLI:<nuser>,<npassword>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<user> DescriptionString type User name for the WAP connection<password> DescriptionString type Password for the WAP connection<nuser> DescriptionIntegernumber Maximum length for username<npassword> DescriptionIntegernumber Maximum length for password
8. DATA - WAP177LZT 123 7263 R1A8.9 AT*EWPA Ericsson WAP Push Access SettingThe command is used to decide if message push is allowed.8.10 AT*EWPB Ericsson WAP Preferred BearerThis command sets the preferred bearer for WAP. If Internet account ischosen as the preferred bearer, the index of the Internet account to beused shall be sent as the second parameter: <IA_index>. If SMS ischosen as the preferred bearer a second parameter is ignored.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets the push access AT*EWPA=<onoff> •OK• +CME ERROR <err>Reads the currentsettings AT*EWPA? *EWPA: <onoff>Tests if the command issupported AT*EWPA=? •*EWPA:(listofsupported <onoff>s)• +CME ERROR <err><onoff> Description0Always ask1Message push disabled2Message push enabledDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet preferred WAPcarrier AT*EWPB=<pbearer>[,<IA_index>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead preferred WAPcarrier AT*EWPB? •*EWPB:<pbearer>[,<IA_index>]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWPB=? •*EWPB:(listofsupported<pbearer>s),(list ofsupported<IA_index>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<pbearer> Description1SMS2Not supported3Internet account
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL178 LZT 123 7263 R1A8.11 AT*EWPN Ericsson WAP Profile NameSets the name of the profile defined by <profile>.<IA_index> Description0Always ask1–65000 Index of Internet account to be used by the WAP browserDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet WAP profilename AT*EWPN=<profile>,<name> • +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERRORList WAP profilenames AT*EWPN? • *EWPN: <profile1>,<name1>,<lock_state>[<CR><LF>*EWPN: <profile2>,<name2>,<lock_state>[...]]• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT*EWPN=? • *EWPN: (list of supported<profile>s), <nlength>,(list ofsupported <lock_state>s)• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERROR<profile> Description1WAP settings profile number 12WAP settings profile number 2…….nWAP settings profile number n<name> DescriptionString value WAP profile name. Max length defined by <nlength><nlength> DescriptionInteger value Max length of WAP profile name<lock_state> Description0The profile is not locked1The profile is locked
8. DATA - WAP179LZT 123 7263 R1A8.12 AT*EWPR Ericsson WAP ProfileSelects active WAP settings profile.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet active WAP profile AT*EWPR=<profile> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORQuery active WAPprofile AT*EWPR? •*EWPR:<profile>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EWPR=? •*EWPR:(listofsupported<profile>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<profile> Description1WAP settings profile number 12WAP settings profile number 2…….nWAP settings profile number n
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL180 LZT 123 7263 R1A
181LZT 123 7263 R1A9. GPS Interoperability9.1 AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2This command enables transmission of NMEA commands fromUART1 to UART2 and vice versa. The module acts as a transparent linkbetween the GPS device connected to UART2 and the applicationcommunicating with it on UART1.When the application sends the command AT*EENMEA=2 the moduleis able to handle both AT and NMEA commands simultaneously. If theOK response is received the application can start handling both NMEAand AT commands. Otherwise the response ERROR is returned.In the mode with simultaneous AT and NMEA commands, <CR> isrequired after each NMEA command and after the last AT commandbefore the new NMEA. NMEA commands must start with a $. AllNMEA commands are forwarded to UART2. All NMEA responsesfrom UART2 are displayed as responses to UART1 along with ATresponses.By sending AT*EENMEA=0, the application ends AT and NMEAcommands, simultaneous handling mode. It sends OK, and then returnsto AT mode.The port rate of UART1 for NMEA commands can be controlled usingthe AT*NMPR command.Description Command Possible ResponsesEnable NMEAcommands on theUARTAT*EENMEA=<mode> •OK•ERROR• +CME ERROR: < err>Show the currentsetting AT*EENMEA? • *EENMEA:<mode>•+CMEERROR:<err>Shows if the commandis supported AT*EENMEA=? • *EENMEA: (list ofsupported<mode>s)• +CME ERROR: < err>Responses DescriptionOK The requested action has been performedERROR Following causes of error are considered:- incorrect syntax- NMEA commands have already been enabled in other07.10 channels
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL182 LZT 123 7263 R1A9.2 AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port RateThis command allows the user to set the physical Data rate for the GPS/NMEA port. The port rate will be set for the GPS/NMEA port onlywhen NMEA is active - see AT*EENMEA.ExamplesAT*E2NMPR=?*E2NMPR=(0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10)OKPort rate currently set:<mode> Description0Disable NMEA communication. Default1Enable NMEA communication in NMEA “only” mode. Notsupported2Enable NMEA communication simultaneously with ATcommandsDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest operation toset data rate for GPS/NMEA PortAT*E2NMPR=<pr> •ERROR•OKDisplays current setting AT*E2NMPR? *E2NMPR: <pr>Show if the commandis supported AT*E2NMPR=? •*E2NMPR:(listofsupported <pr>s)•ERROR<op> Descriptiono600 Baud rate11200 Baud rate22400 Baud rate34800 Baud rate49600 Baud rate. Default setting519200 Baud rate638400 Baud rate757600 Baud rate8115200 Baud rate9230400 Baud rate10 460800 Baud rate
9. GPS INTEROPERABILITY183LZT 123 7263 R1AAT*E2NMPR?*E2NMPR: 4OKSet GPS/NMEA port rate to 4800 baud:AT*E2NMPR=2OK
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL184 LZT 123 7263 R1A
185LZT 123 7263 R1A10. Internet10.1 AT*ENAD Ericsson Internet Account DefineDescription Command Possible ResponsesDefine anInternetaccountAT*ENAD=[<index>][,<name>,<userid>,<password>,<bearer>,(bearer_settings)]If <bearer>=0(bearer_settings):=<dialup_nr>,<dial_type>, <data_rate>If <bearer>=1(bearer_settings):=<pref_serv>,<pap_chap>If <bearer>=2(bearer_settings):=<bt_device_address>•*ENAD:<index>[,<cid>]•+CMEERROR<err>Read thecurrentsettingsAT*ENAD? *ENAD:list of <index>s with corresponding<name>, <userid>, <bearer> followed bythe list of bearer dependent parametersIf <bearer>=0(bearer_settings):=<dialup_nr>,<dial_type>,<data_rate>, <lock_state>If <bearer>=1(bearer_settings):=<pref_serv>,<pap_chap>,<cid>,<lock_state>If <bearer>=2(bearer_settings):=<bt_device_address>,<lock_state>+CME ERROR <err>Test if thecommandissupportedAT*ENAD=? *ENAD:list of supported <index>s,maxlength of <name>,max length of<userid>,max length of <password>,(0),max length of ,list of supported<dial_type>s,list of supported<data_rate>s,list of supported<lock_state>s*ENAD:list of supported <index>s,maxlength of <name>,max length of<userid>,max length of <password>, (1),listof supported <pref_serv>s,list of supported<pap_chap>s,list of supported<lock_state>s*ENAD:list of supported <index>s,maxlength of <name>,max length of<userid>,max length of <password>,(2),max length of <bt_device_address>,list of supported <lock_state>s+CME ERROR <err>
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL186 LZT 123 7263 R1AThis command is used for defining an Internet account.<index> Descriptioninteger1-65000 Each Internet account is given a unique index<name> Descriptionstring(maximum of20, 16-bitcharacters)Each Internet account has a username<userid> Descriptionstring (max 308-bitcharacters)TheuserIDtobeusedwhensettinguptheconnection<passwd> Descriptionstring(maximum of30, 8-bitcharacters)The passwd to be used when setting up the connection<bearer> Description0Circuit switched dial-up1Packet domain service2Bluetooth. Not supported3SMS. Not supported<dialup_nr> Descriptionstring (max 308-bitcharacters)The phone number to be used when setting up theconnection<dial_type> Description0GSM data (CSD)1Digital (ISDN)
10. INTERNET187LZT 123 7263 R1A<data_rate> Description19600214400319200428800<cid> Descriptioninteger ID number of a PDP context as defined in AT+CGDCONT(S15)<pref_serv> Description0Automatic1Packet domain service only<pap_chap> Description0Normal: only PAP allowed1Secure: only CHAP allowed2None: no authentication scheme is used<bt_device_address> Description48 bit IEEE address, sixgroups of two hexadecimalnumbers separated by “:”.E.g. “1A:3C:CD:33:1F:G8”This parameter is used to set the Bluetoothdevice address for the Bluetoothconnection being set up<lock_state> Description0The account is not locked1The account is locked
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL188 LZT 123 7263 R1A
189LZT 123 7263 R1A11. Identification11.1 AT Attention CommandThis command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MSsupports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code.11.2 AT&F Set to Factory Defined ConfigurationThis command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default valuesspecified by the manufacturer, which may take in considerationhardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria.Description Command Possible ResponsesChecks the communicationbetween the MS andapplicationAT •OK• +CME ERROR <err>Description Command Possible ResponsesExecute AT&F •OK•ERRORExecute AT&F=<profile> •OK•ERRORShow if supported andlist availableparameter rangeAT&F=? &F: (list of supported<profile>s)<profile > Description0Select the factory profile to restore
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL190 LZT 123 7263 R1A11.3 AT&W Store User ProfileThis command stores the current user profile in non-volatile memory.11.4 AT* List all Supported AT CommandsLists all the commands supported by the MS.11.5 AT*ESIR Read MS System Interface ReleaseCauses the MS to return the interface release.Description Command Possible ResponsesStores the current userprofile to non volatilememoryAT&W=[<pr>] orAT&W[<pr>] •OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT&W=? &W: (list of supported<pr>s)<pr> Description0Stores current settings in User Profile 0Description Command Possible ResponsesList all implemented ATcommands AT* <AT Command1>[<CR> <LF><AT Command2>[…]]/<AT Command1>[<CR> <LF><AT Command2>[…]]Description Command Possible ResponsesRead MS systeminterface release AT*ESIR *ESIR:<x>.<y>Show if the commandis supported AT*ESIR=? •OK•ERROR<x> DescriptionInteger type Major version (one digit)<y> DescriptionInteger type Minor version (one digit)
11. IDENTIFICATION191LZT 123 7263 R1A11.6 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer IdentificationCauses the MS to return one or more lines of information text.]11.7 AT+CGMM Read MS Model IdentificationCauses the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>,determined by the MS manufacturer. It is intended to permit the user ofthe ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it isconnected. Typically the text will consist of a single line containing thename of the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide moreinformation if desired.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest manufactureridentification AT+CGMI <manufacturer>+CME ERROR: <err>Show if the commandis supported AT+CGMI=? •OK•ERROR<manufacturer> DescriptionSONY ERICSSON This company’s name in upper case lettersDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest the modelidentification AT+CGMM <model type><modelname>+CME ERROR: <err>Show if the commandis supported AT+CGMM=? •OK•ERROR<model type> DescriptionString type A unique ASCII character/digit string, always 10characters long. Spaces are used when the number ofcharacters/digitsislessthan10<model name> DescriptionString type Model name for the transceiver unit, for example, GM47
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL192 LZT 123 7263 R1A11.8 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision IdentificationThis command causes the MS to return a string containing informationabout the software version.11.9 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number IdentificationThis command causes the MS to return the IMEI (International Mobilestation Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest MS revisionidentification string AT+CGMR <revision>+CME ERROR: <err>Show if the commandis supported AT+CGMR=? •OK•ERROR<revision> DescriptionString type An ASCII string containing date (year, month, day, hour,minute) plus KRC number.Example: 9710051610 CXC125112Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest product serialnumber AT+CGSN •+CGSN:<sn>•+CMEERROR:<err>Show if the commandis supported AT+CGSN=? •OK•ERROR<sn> DescriptionString The IMEISV, which is the IMEI (International Mobile stationEquipment Identity; refer GSM 03.03 [4]) number of the ME andthe software version number. Text shall not contain thesequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>
11. IDENTIFICATION193LZT 123 7263 R1A11.10 AT+GMI Read Manufacturer IdentificationThis command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines ofinformation text. Typically, the text will consist of a single linecontaining the name of the manufacturer, but may provide moreinformation such as address and telephone number for customerservice.11.11 AT+GMM Read Model IdentificationThis command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines ofinformation text, determined by the manufacturer, which is intended topermit the user of the DCE to identify the specific model of device.Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the name ofthe product, but manufacturers may choose to provide any informationdesired.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest manufactureridentification AT+GMI <manufacturer>Test if command issupported AT+GMI=? •OK•ERROR<manufacture> Descriptionstring type The total number of characters, including lineterminators, in the information text returned in responseto this command shall not exceed 2048 characters.Note that the information text shall not contain thesequence “0 ” or “OK”, so that DTE can avoid falsedetection of the end of this information textDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest revisionidentification AT+GMM <model>Test if command issupported AT+GMM=? •OK•ERROR<model> Descriptionstring type The total number of characters, including line terminators,in the information text returned in response to thiscommand shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note thatthe information text shall not contain the sequence “0 ” or“OK”, so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end ofthis information text
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL194 LZT 123 7263 R1A11.12 AT+GMR Read Revision IdentificationThis command returns a manufacturer specified software revision namein a text string.11.13 ATI Identification InformationThis command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text,followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used toselect from among multiple types of identifying information as shownin the table below.This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest revisionidentification AT+GMR <revision>Test if command issupported AT+GMR=? •OK•ERROR<revision> Descriptionstring type The total number of characters, including line terminators,in the information text returned in response to thiscommand shall not exceed 2048 characters. Note thatthe information text shall not contain the sequence "0" or"OK", so that DTE can avoid false detection of the end ofthis information textDescription Command Possible ResponsesExecute ATI[<value>] <information><value > Description0Same information as +GMM command (modelidentification)1Same information as +GMR command (revisionidentification)3Modem model description5Active settings7Modem configuration profile (brief listing of the modemfunctionality: fax classes, Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type,etc.)8DCEhardwaretypeversion9PnP (plug and play) information10 Same information as +GMI command (manufactureridentification). Not supported
195LZT 123 7263 R1A12. Input/Output12.1 AT*E2IO Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/WriteControls the operation of the general purpose I/O signals. It is possibleto perform up to 5 operations. The operations are as follows:• Read the state of the input/output signals. Digital state or digitalvalue of an ADC input or the DAC output.In case of a digital I/O, the command has the following aspect:AT*E2IO=0,“I1”*E2IO: 0,“I1”,0OKIf the requested read is focused on analogue information, the digital readis as follows:AT*E2IO=0,“AD1”*E2IO: 0,“AD1”,,62OK• Write: fixes an output with a specific value. Two possible values fordigital sources or 256 values for the analogue ones. The response isOK or ERROR if giving an output to the signal is not possible.• Configure: configuration is applicable to those signals that are bi-directional. Configuration changes the signal direction. The responseis OK, or ERROR if the signal is not bi-directional.• Configure check: checks the state of the I/Os.• Trigger: the MS can be programmed to send an unsolicited resultcode whenever a change in one of the inputs has been produced. Thetrigger has to be configured for each input.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest operation ofthe I/O signals AT*E2IO=<op>,<io>[,<val>][,<adc_val>] •ERROR•OK•*E2IO:<op>,<io>[,<val>][,<adc_val>]OKShow if the commandis supported AT*E2IO=? •*E2IO:(listofsupported <op>s),<io>s,(list ofsupported <val>s),(list of supported<adc_val>s)•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL196 LZT 123 7263 R1A• Trigger check: checks the state of the inputs..<op> Description0Read1Write2Configure3Configure check4Trigger5Trigger check<io> Description“I1” Digital Input 1. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5“I2” Digital Input 2. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5“I3” Digital Input 3. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5“I4” Digital Input 4. Supported Operations: 0,2,3,4,5“I5” Digital Input 5. Supported Operations: 0,4,5“O1” Digital Output 1. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3“O2” Digital Output 2. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3“O3” Digital Output 3. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3“O4” Digital Output 4. Supported Operations: 0,1,2,3“O5” Digital Output 5. Supported Operations: 0,1“O6” Digital Output 6. Supported Operations: 0,1“O7” Digital Output 7. Supported Operations: 0,1“DA1” Digital/Analogue Input: Supported Operations: 0,1“AD1” Analogue/Digital Output 1: Supported Operations: 0“AD2” Analogue/Digital Output 2: Supported Operations: 0“AD3” Analogue/Digital Output 3: Supported Operations: 0<val> Description0The digital I/O is not active. The logic value is FALSE1The digital I/O is active. Logic value is TRUE<adc_val> Description0-255 The decimal value shall represent the analogue voltage itis hold on the I/O. Applicable only to A/D or D/A signals
197LZT 123 7263 R1A13. Interface13.1 AT+CPIN PIN ControlSee 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control13.2 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) ControlDetermines the behaviour of the carrier detect.13.3 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) ResponseControls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet behavior of carrierdetect AT&C[<value>] OKERROR<value> Description0DCD always on1DCD follows the connection. Default valueDescription Command Possible ResponsesControl actions fromDTE AT&D[<value>] OKERROR<value> Description0Ignore. Default value1When in on-line data mode, switch to on-line commandmode. For all other states, see <value>=22Disconnect and switch to off-line command mode
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL198 LZT 123 7263 R1A13.4 AT+WS46 Mode SelectionAllows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode ofthe phone.13.5 ATE Command EchoThe setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoescharacters received from the DTE during command state and onlinecommand state.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets the cellularprotocol mode AT+WS46=n •OK•ERRORQueries the currentcellular protocol mode AT+WS46? •<n>OK•ERRORQueries the possiblecellular protocolmodesAT+WS46=? • (list of supported <n>s) OK•ERROR<n> parameter Description12 This value is used for GSM at 900 Mhz., DCS-1800, andPCS-1900 phonesDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest CommandEcho ATE[<value>] •OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting ATE? <value>Show if the commandis supported ATE=? E: (list of supported<value>s)<value> Description0DCE does not echo characters during command state andonline command state1DCE echoes characters during command state and onlinecommand state. Default value
13. INTERFACE199LZT 123 7263 R1A13.6 ATV DCE Response FormatSelect either descriptive or numeric response codes.List of result codesDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet DCE responseformat ATV[=]<value> •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting ATV? V: <value>Show if the commandis supported ATV=? V: (list of supported<value>s)<value> Description0Display numeric result codes1Display verbose result codes. Default valueATV1 ATV0 DescriptionOK 0Acknowledges execution of acommandCONNECT 1A connection has been established;the DCE is moving from commandstate to online data stateRING 2The DCE has detected an incomingcall signal from the networkNO CARRIER 3The connection has been terminatedor the attempt to establish aconnection failedERROR 4Command not recognized, commandline maximum length exceeded,parameter value invalid, or otherproblem with processing the commandlineNO DIALTONE 6No dial tone detectedBUSY 7Engaged (busy) signal detectedNO ANSWER 8“@”(WaitforQuietAnswer)dialmodifier was used, but remote ringingfollowed by five seconds of silence wasnot detected before expiration of theconnection timerCONNECT<TEXT> Manufacturer-specific Same as CONNECT, but includesmanufacturer-specific text that mayspecify DTE speed, line speed, errorcontrol, data compression, or otherstatus
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL200 LZT 123 7263 R1A13.7 ATZ Reset to Default ConfigurationThis command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their defaultvalues as specified by the user. Consider hardware configurationswitches or non-volatile parameter storage(if implemented) when usingthis command.Commands included on the same command line as the Z command willbe ignored.Description Command Possible ResponsesExecute ATZ •OK•ERRORExecute ATZ=<profile> •OK•ERRORShow if supported andlist availableparameter rangeATZ=? Z: (list of supported<profile>s)<profile > Description0Select the user profile to restore
13. INTERFACE201LZT 123 7263 R1A13.8 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex ProtocolThe command is used to turn on the multiplexer. Only “notransparency” is supported. The parameter <k> is not used.Description Command Possible ResponsesSwitch to 07.10 AT+CMUX=<transparency>[,<subset>[,<port_speed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>[,<T3>[,<k>]]]]]]]]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORReturns currentsetting formultiplexerAT+CMUX? • +CMUX:<transparency>,<subset>,<port_speed>,<N1>,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>[,<k>]•+CMEERROR:<err>Show list ofsupportedservicesAT+CMUX=? • +CMUX: (list of supported<transparency>s),(list of supported <subset>s),(list of supported<port_speed>s),(list of supported <N1>s),(list of supported <T1>s),(list of supported <N2>s),(list of supported <T2>s),(list of supported <T3>s),(list of supported <k>)•+CMEERROR:<err><transparency> Description0No transparency1HDLC Transparency. Not supported<subset> Description0Only UIH frames used1UI frames may be used. Not supported2I frames may be used (error recovery is activated). Notsupported<port_speed> Description19600 bit/s219200 bit/s338400 bit/s457600 bit/s5115200 bit/s6230400 bit/s. Not supported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL202 LZT 123 7263 R1A<N1> Description1..128 Maximum frame size. Only <N1>=31 supported31 Default maximum frame size<T1> Description1..255 Acknowledgement timer (tens of milliseconds). Only<T1>=10 supported10 100ms default timer<N2> Description1..100 Maximum number of re-transmissions. Only <N2>=3supported3Default maximum number of re-transmissions<T2> Description2..255 Control channel response timer (tenths of milliseconds).Only <T2>=30 supported30 300ms default timer<T3> Description1..255 Wake up response timer (seconds). Only <T3>=10supported10 10s default timer<k> Description0Window size1..7 Window size. Not supported
13. INTERFACE203LZT 123 7263 R1A13.9 AT+CRES Restore SettingsRestores message service settings from non-volatile memory to activememory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settingsspecified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set MessageParameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB(if implemented) are restored. Certain settings, such as SIM SMSparameters, cannot be restored.Description Command Possible ResponsesRestore settings AT+CRES[=<profile>] • +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORGet available profiles AT+CRES=? •+CRES:(listofsupported<profile>s)• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERROR<profile> Description0..2 Profilenumberwheresettingsaretobestored.Defaultiszero
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL204 LZT 123 7263 R1A13.10 AT+ICF Cable Interface Character FormatThis extended-format compound parameter is used to determine thelocal serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by theDCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information textand result code, if this is not automatically determined; (Notsupported) +IPR=0 forces +ICF=0 (see +IPR).Description Command Possible ResponsesDefines DTE-DCEcharacter framing AT+ICF=[format[,parity]] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+ICF? •+ICF:<format>,<parity>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+ICF=? •+ICF:(listofsupported<format>s), (list ofsupported <parity>s)•OK•ERROR<format> Description0auto detect. Not supported18Data2Stop.Not supported28Data1Parity1Stop.Not supported38Data1Stop.Default value47Data2Stop.Not supported57Data1Parity1Stop.Not supported67Data1Stop.Not supported<parity> Description0Odd. Not supported1Even. Not supported2Mark. Not supported3Space. Default value
13. INTERFACE205LZT 123 7263 R1A13.11 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow ControlDefines the flow control between the modem and the computer when inon-line data mode.No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes.13.12 AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate ReportingSpecifies whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>”information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate>reported shall represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-DCE rate. If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted afterany modulation, error control or data compression reports areDescription Command Possible ResponsesDefines DTE-DCE localflow control AT+IFC=[<by_te>,[<by_ta>]] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+IFC? +IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta>Show if the commandis supported AT+IFC=? +IFC: (list of supported<by_te>s,<by_ta>s)<by_te> Description0No flow control on DTE1Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters areremovedbytheDCEinterface2RTS flow control on DCE. Default value3Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters arepassed to the remote DCE/DTE<by_ta> Description0No flow control on DCE1Xon/Xoff flow control on DTE2CTS flow control on DCE. Default valueDescription Command Possible ResponsesDefines DTE-DCEcharacter framing AT+ILRR=<value> •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+ILRR? +ILRR:<value>Show if the commandis supported AT+ILRR=? +ILRR:(list of supported<values>s)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL206 LZT 123 7263 R1Atransmitted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) istransmitted. The <rate> is applied after the final result code istransmitted.13.13 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port CommandSpecifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, inaddition to 1200 bit/s or 9600 bit/s (as required in v25ter [1], subclause4.3). It may be used to select operation at rates used by the DTE, whichthe DCE is not capable of automatically detecting.(Not supported) Specifying a value of 0 disables the function andallows operation only at rates automatically detectable by the DCE.The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any resultcode(s) associated with the current command line.<value> Description0Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is nottransmitted). Default value1Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is transmitted)Description Command Possible ResponsesDefines fixed DTE rate AT+IPR=[rate] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+IPR? •+IPR:<rate>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+IPR=? • +IPR: (), (list of fixed-only <rate>s)]•OK•ERROR<rate> DescriptionDiscreteinteger value The <rate>valuespecifiedshallbetherateinbitspersecond at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate,e.g. “19200” or “115200”. The rates supported by aparticular DCE are manufacturer specific.The following rates, are supported (with two exceptions);120024004800960014400 (Not supported)1920028800 (Not supported)384005760076800115200230400460800
13. INTERFACE207LZT 123 7263 R1A13.14 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard TimeDefines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS to return to on-line command mode i.e. if +++AT<CR> is received either as part of thedata stream or a terminating string from the application and no furtherdata is received for the duration of the guard time the module will gointo on line command mode. This guards against the moduleaccidentally going into on line command mode.Description Syntax Possible responsesSet GPRS onlinecommand guard time AT*E2ESC=[<gt>] •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*E2ESC? *E2ESC: <gt>Show if the commandis supported AT*E2ESC=? •OK•ERROR<gt> Description0No guard time. Default value1-10 Guard time in seconds
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL208 LZT 123 7263 R1A
209LZT 123 7263 R1A14. Network14.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell DescriptionControls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD: when<n>=1, or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters,E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>.Read command returns the status of result code presentation and severalvalues, which show the network cell parameters.Location information <lac>, <ci> and <ta> are returned only when<n>=1 and the ME is registered in the network. To know if the ME isregistered use the AT+CREG command. If the ME is not registered inthe cellular network an ERROR message is returned.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest network celldescription AT*E2CD=<n> •ERROR•OKRead the command AT*E2CD? •*E2CD:<n>,<lac>,<ci>,<ta>•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*E2CD=? •*E2CD:(listofsupported <n>s)•ERROR<n> Description0Disable network location information unsolicited resultcode, (default)1Enable network location information unsolicited resultcode *E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta><lac> DescriptionString type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format<ci> Descriptionstring type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL210 LZT 123 7263 R1A<ta> Description0-63 According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timingadvance value is the binary representation of the timingadvance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is theinteger representation of the timing advance in binaryformat64-255 Reserved
14. NETWORK211LZT 123 7263 R1A14.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring ModeDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet theresponsepresentationmodeAT*E2EMM=<n>[,<m>] • ERROR•OKDisplay modeneighbour cellsare taken fromthe toplist*E2EMM:Serving CellMCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,TN],<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],NeighBours CellsMCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,C2],<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]…<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]OKCompact mode.The first cell is theserving cell, therest areneighbour cellstaken from thetoplist*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>][,<rxlSub>,<rxqsub>,<ta>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,…<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>OKVerbose mode.The first cell is theserving cell andthe rest areneighbour cellsas provided bythe network inthe system info.messages (2 and5) and via theAT*E2NBTScommand*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]…<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]OKReduced displaymode - info. asdisplay mode butwithout textheadings or<CR><LF>separators,neighbour cellsfrom top list*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]…<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]OKRead thecommand AT*E2EMM? • *E2EMM: <n>• ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT*E2EMM=?• *E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(listof supported <m>s)• ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL212 LZT 123 7263 R1AThere are four presentation format modes (Display, Compact, Verbose,and Reduced Display) and two response types (one shot response orcontinuous unsolicited responses).The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display thedata in a readable form, including headers and line breaks(<CR><LF>). This format is, however, not well suited for machinedecoding. The formats Verbose, Compact and Reduced Display do nothave headers or line breaks. Verbose mode displays more parametersthan the compact mode.The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information oran unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response.ExamplesAT*E2EMM=1*E2EMM:<CR><LF>Serving Cell<CR><LF>MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,TN]<CR><LF><mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>]<CR><LF>NeighBours Cells<CR><LF>MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,C2]<CR><LF><mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF><mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>…<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>OKAT*E2EMM=3*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell ci>,<servcellbsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>][,<servcell rxlSub>,<servcellrxqsub>,<servcell ta>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1mnc>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>,<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2mnc>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>,…<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcellnrxl><CR><LF>OKAT*E2EMM=5*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,<servcellci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,<servcellC1>,<servcell C2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,<servcellrxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell tn>,<servcell ta>],
14. NETWORK213LZT 123 7263 R1A<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1lac>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 C1>,<neighborcell1C2>],<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2lac>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 C1>,<neighborcell2 C2>],…<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnlac>,<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcellnch>,<neighborcelln rxl> [,<neighborcelln C1>,<neighborcellnC2>]<CR><LF>OKAT*E2EMM=7*E2EMM:<servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,<servcellci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,<servcellc1>,<servcell c2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,<servcellrxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>,<servcell tn>],<neighborcell1mcc>,< neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,<neighborcell1ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 c1>,<neighborcell1 c2>],<neighborcell2mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,<neighborcell2ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2rxl>[,<neighborcell2 c1>,<neighborcell2c2>]…<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcelln mnc>,<neighborcellnlac>,<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcellnch>,<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln c1>,<neighborcelln c2>]OKThe mode setting <n> in the set command has the combination listed inthe table below.When <n>=5, the shot information is the same as in <n> = 1, butneighbouring cells, which have to be up to 16. This is the informationthat comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH, reporting the BTSthat are on the Serving Cell's surroundings.<n> Description0Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code.Default1One shot presentation of the network locationinformation. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF>line separators2Enable network location information unsolicited resultcode in Display mode (like n=1). There will be continuousunsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart3One shot presentation of the compact network locationinformation
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL214 LZT 123 7263 R1A4Enable compact network location information unsolicitedresult code. There will be continuous unsolicitedinformation responses <m> seconds apart5One shot presentation of the network location information(verbose format), including 16 BTSs, coming from theServing Cell signalling information6As n=5 format but there will be continuous unsolicitedinformation responses <m> seconds apart7One shot presentation of the network information (sameinformationasinn=1)butnoheadersor<CR><LF>lineseparators. Neighbor cells from the Toplist8As n=7 format but there will be continuous unsolicitedinformation responses <m> seconds apart<m> Description1-255 Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicitedresponses. Default=5<mcc> DescriptionInteger type Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Codeidentifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU<mnc> DescriptionInteger type Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Codeidentifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell<lac> DescriptionInteger type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format<ci> DescriptionInteger type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format<bsic> DescriptionInteger type One byte Base Stations Identification code inhexadecimal format<ch> Description(0-1023) It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RFChannel, which identifies the BCCH carrier<n> Description
14. NETWORK215LZT 123 7263 R1A<rxqsub> is the parameter that indicates the quality in the receivedsignal on dedicated mode. The measurement average is applied to asubset of a SACCH multiframe.<rxl> DescriptionInteger type Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idlemode<rxlfull> DescriptionInteger type Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level istaken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe<rxlsub> DescriptionInteger type Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level istaken from the DownLink signal and the average isapplied to subset of SACCH frames<rxqfull> Description0BER < 0.1%10.26% < BER < 0.30%20.51% < BER < 0.64%31.0%<BER<1.3%41.9%<BER<2.7%53.8%<BER<5.4%67.6%<BER<11.0%7BER > 15.0%<mcc> DescriptionInteger type Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Codeidentifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU<rxqsub> Description0BER < 0.1%10.26% < BER < 0.30%20.51% < BER < 0.64%31.0%<BER<1.3%
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL216 LZT 123 7263 R1A41.9% < BER < 2.7%53.8% < BER < 5.4%67.6% < BER < 11.0%7BER > 15.0%<c1> DescriptionInteger Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MScalculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if thecell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation thecriterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08<c2> DescriptionInteger Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. Thisparameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection<ta> Description0-63 According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timingadvance value is the binary representation of the timingadvance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is theinteger representation of the timing advance in binaryformat64-255 Reserved<tn> Description0-7 Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel<rxqsub> Description
14. NETWORK217LZT 123 7263 R1A14.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider IndicationCauses the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIMcard (<spi> parameter). The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytescontaining the service provider name stored in the EFSPN file in theSIM card (see GSM 11.11).14.4 AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS StatusUsed to request the MS to give ALS (Alternate Line Services) status.The information is available on the SIM card. If ALS is active, the userhas two lines for voice calls. The line number or name tag for the line isthen indicated on the display.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest serviceprovider indication AT*E2SPN •*E2SPN:<spi>•+CMEERROR:<err>Show if the commandis supported AT*E2SPN=? •OK•ERROR<spi> DescriptionString String type field of maximum length 16 bytes; characterset as specified by command Select TE character set+CSCSDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequests current statusfor ALS AT*EALS •*EALS:<status>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*EALS=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<status> Description0ALS function is not active (off)1ALS function is active (on)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL218 LZT 123 7263 R1A14.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service ProfileThis command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) fromthe SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that areuser accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP.The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells whichservices are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0.Description Command Possible ResponsesRead the customerservice profile from theSIMAT*ECSP=<servicegroup> •*ECSP:<servicegroup>,<services>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ECSP=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<servicegroup> DescriptionByte Each service group has a corresponding number, servicegroup code<services> Descriptionbyte Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the servicegroupBit=0: unused or unavailable serviceBit=1: available service
14. NETWORK219LZT 123 7263 R1A14.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred NetworkThis command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks(EFPLMNsel).Description Command Possible ResponsesRead entries in SIMpreferred list AT*EPNR=<format>[,<index1>[,<index2]]•*EPNR:<index1>,<oper1>[...]*EPNR: <index2>,<oper2>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported and list thepossible settingsAT*EPNR=? •*EPNR:(listofsupported <index>s),(list of supported<format>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<index1> Descriptioninteger Start index (>0)<index2> Descriptioninteger Stop index (>0)<format> Description2Numeric <oper><oper> Descriptionstring String indicates the code for the operator.E.g. GSM - Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL220 LZT 123 7263 R1A14.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred NetworkThis command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks(EFPLMNsel). The entry field <oper> contains mobile country code(MCC) and mobile network code (MNC).Description Command Possible ResponsesWrite/delete entries inSIM preferred list AT*EPNW=[<index>][,<format>,<oper>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported and list thepossible settingsAT*EPNW=? •*EPNW:(listofsupported<index>s), (list ofsupported<format>)s•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<index> DescriptionInteger Index to entry in SIM preferred list.The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positionsaccording to GSM 11.11<format> Description0Long format alphanumeric <oper>. Not supported1Shortformatalphanumeric<oper>.Not supported2Numeric <oper><oper> DescriptionString String indicates the code for the operator.E.g. GSM – Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network
14. NETWORK221LZT 123 7263 R1A14.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial NumberThis command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field(address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE.This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.EXAMPLESAT*E2SSN?8944110063503224707OK:- where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is984411003605234207F7.Test command:AT*E2SSN=?OKDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest SIM Serialnumber AT*E2SSN? *E2ESSN: <SSN>Shows if the commandis supported AT*E2SSN=? •OK•ERROR<SSN> DescriptionString withoutdouble quotes SIM serial number
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL222 LZT 123 7263 R1A14.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line NameSets the name tag for a selected line.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets the line name tagin the MS AT*ESLN=<line>[,<name>] • +CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*ESLN? •*ESLN:<line1>,<name1><CR><LF>*ESLN: <line2>,<name2>• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported and list thepossible settingsAT*ESLN=? • *ESLN: (list of supported<line>s),<lname>• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERROR<line> Description0Default. This means that the two lines will use the defaultnametags,i.e."L1"and"L2"1Line 12Line 2<name> DescriptionString Characters for name tagThis parameter is optional when <line> is set to 0<lname> DescriptionInteger Max. number of characters to use in <name> string (20)
14. NETWORK223LZT 123 7263 R1A14.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber IdentificationCauses the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIMattached to the ME.14.11 AT+CLCK Facility LockThe command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a networkfacility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions.Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services (referto GSM 02.88 [6]). The interaction of these, with other commandsbased on other GSM supplementary services, is described in the GSMstandard.Description Syntax Possible ResponsesRead IMSI AT+CIMI •<IMSI>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CIMI=? •OK•ERROR<IMSI> Descriptionstring withoutdouble quotes International Mobile Subscriber IdentityDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest facility lock AT+CLCK=<fac>,<mode>[,<passwd>[,<class>]]• when <mode>=2 andcommand successful:+CLCK:<status>[,<class1>[<CR><LF>+CLCK:<status>,<class2>[...]]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CLCK=? •+CLCK:(listofsupported <fac>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK<fac > Description“CS” CNTRL (lock CoNTRoL surface (e.g. phone keyboard))“PS” PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password whenother than current SIM card inserted)“SC” SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-upand when this lock command issued)“P2” SIM PIN2
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL224 LZT 123 7263 R1A“AO” BAOC (bar all outgoing calls)“OI” BOIC (bar outgoing international calls)“AI” BAIC (bar all incoming calls)“IR” BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside thehome country)“OX” BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except tohome country)“NT” Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored to TA memory.Not Supported“NM” Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored to MEmemory. Not Supported“NS” Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored to SIMmemory. Not Supported“NA” Bar incoming calls from numbers Not stored in Anymemory. Not Supported“AB” All barring services“AG” All out going barring services“AC” All in coming barring services“PN” Network personalization“PU” Network subset personalization“PP” Service provider personalization“PC” Corporate personalization<mode> Description0Unlock1Lock2Query status10 Full lock (only valid for <fac>=”PS”, after power on alwaysask for password)<status> Description0Not active1Active<passw> Descriptionstring type Is the same as password specified for the facility from theME user interface or with change password command,+CPWD<fac > Description
14. NETWORK225LZT 123 7263 R1A14.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber NumberThis command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (thisinformation can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber hasdifferent MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in aseparate line.<classx> Description1Voice L12Data4Fax8Short message service16 Data circuit sync32 Data circuit async64 Dedicated packet access128 Voice L21..30 When “no reply” is enabled or queried, this gives the timein seconds to wait before the call is forwarded. Defaultvalue is 20Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest subscribernumber AT+CNUM •+CNUM:[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR><LF>+CNUM:[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>[,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][…]]• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CNUM=? • +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERROR<alphax> DescriptionAlphanumericstring Associated with <numberx>; used characterset should bethe one selected with the Select TE character setcommand, +CSCS<numberx> DescriptionString type Phone number of format specified by <typex><typex> DescriptionInteger format Type of address, (refer to GSM 04.08 [3] subclause 10.5.4.7)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL226 LZT 123 7263 R1A<speed> Descriptiondata rate As defined in subclause 6.7 GSM 07.07 [1]<service> Description0Asynchronous modem1Synchronous modem. Not supported2PAD access (asynchronous). Not supported3Packet access (synchronous). Not supported4Voice5Fax6..127 All other values below 128 are reserved by GSM 07.07 [1].Not supported<itc> Description03.1kHz1UDI
14. NETWORK227LZT 123 7263 R1A14.13 AT+COPS Operator SelectionForces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest operatorselection AT+COPS=[<mode>[,<format>[,<oper>]]]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORShows the currentsetting AT+COPS? •+COPS:<mode>[,<format>,<oper>]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+COPS=? • +COPS:list of supported(<stat>,longalphanumeric <oper>,short alphanumeric<oper>,numeric<oper>)s• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERROR<mode> Description0Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)1Manual (<oper> field shall be present)3Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do notattempt registration/de-registration (<oper> field isignored); this value is not applicable in read commandresponse4Manual/automatic (<oper> field shall be present); ifmanual selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) isentered<format> Description0Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)1Shortformatalphanumeric<oper>2Numeric <oper><oper> Descriptionstring type Format determined by the <format> setting
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL228 LZT 123 7263 R1A14.14 AT+CREG Network RegistrationControls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.<stat> Description0Unknown1Available2Current3ForbiddenDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest networkregistration AT+CREG=[<n>] • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORRead the command AT+CREG? •+CREG:<n>,<stat>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CREG=? •+CREG:(listofsupported <n>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<n> Description0Disable network registration unsolicited result code,(default)1Enable network registration unsolicited result code<stat> Description0Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a newoperator to register with1Registered, home network2Notregistered,butMEiscurrentlysearchingforanewoperator to register with3Registration denied
229LZT 123 7263 R1A15. Phonebook15.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check SumCauses the ME to return the phone book checksum <cks> storedinternally . Phone book checksum is recalculated whenever there is achange in the phone book. By requesting the checksum, the externalapplication can detect if the phone book in the ME has changed, withoutdownloading the whole phone book.During the SIM initialisation process, it takes some time to downloadthe phone book from the SIM card to the ME, depending on the numberof entries. In case the command is invoked before the checksum hasbeen calculated, the ME gives an ERROR message.15.2 AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to GroupThis command adds a contact or a phone number to the current group.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest phone bookchecksum AT*E2PBCS •*E2PBCS:<cks>•+CMEERROR:<err>Show if the commandis supported AT*E2PBCS=? •OK•ERROR<cks> DescriptionHex type 1 byte in hexadecimal (between “”), containing thechecksumDescription Command Possible ResponsesAddsa new item to thegroup with <gindex> AT*ESAG=<gindex>,<type>,<itemindex>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supportedand list thepossible settingsAT*ESAG=? •*ESAG:(listofsupported<gindex>s, list ofsupported <type>s•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL230 LZT 123 7263 R1A15.3 AT*ESCG Ericsson Create GroupThis command creates a new group in the hierarchical phone book. Thegroup is stored at the first available position. There are 10 grouppositions in the hierarchical phone book.<gindex> Description1-10 The group index within the hierarchical phone book<type> Description1Contact2Phone number<itemindex> DescriptionInteger The index of the contact/group/phone number to add.The <itemindex> parameter has the following meaning: ifthe item to add is a contact, the <itemindex> is the indexof the contact in the contacts book. If the item to add is aphone number the <itemindex> is the index in the phonebookDescription Command Possible ResponsesAdds a new group tothe hierarchical phonebookAT*ESCG=<name> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShows if the commandis supported AT*ESCG=? •*ESCG:<maxnamelength>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<name> DescriptionString The group name. Character set as specified bycommand Select TE Character Set (AT+CSCS)<maxnamelength> Descriptioninteger The maximum length of the grouping (bytes)
15. PHONEBOOK231LZT 123 7263 R1A15.4 AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card NumberCommand is used to:• set up a credit card number in the ME.• disable credit card calls.• enable one of the credit card call services.• query the settings for one of the services.• query the active credit call access server.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet up a credit cardnumber AT*ESCN=<mode>[,<passwd>][,<indexn>][,<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode>[,<sendorder>]]•+CMEERROR:<err>whenmode=3:*ESCN:<indexn>,<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode>,<send order>Whenmode=4:*ESCN:<selindexn>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ESCN=? •*ESCN:(listofsupported<index>s),(list ofsupported<mode>s),(list ofsupported <sendorder>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Settings for a credit card call (<passwd>, <indexn>,<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode> [,<send order>]). Thefour (4) parameters (<passwd>, <indexn>, <asn>,<vercode>) are mandatory when <mode> = 0. If all thoseare not submitted ERROR will be returned1Disable credit card calling (<passwd>). If any otherparameters are submitted, they are ignored2Enable one of the credit card call services (<passwd>,<indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, theyare ignored3Query (<passwd>, <indexn>). If any other parameters aresubmitted, they are ignored4Query for the selected credit call access server. If anyparameters are submitted, they are ignored<passwd> DescriptionString character string, phone lock code “PS”, PH-SIM
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL232 LZT 123 7263 R1A<indexn> Description1Index number to the first credit card call access server2Index number to the second credit card call access server<selindexn> Description0Credit card calling disabled1Index number to the first credit card call access server2Index number to the second credit card call access server<asn> DescriptionString Character string <0..9,+>, max. 20 characters Phonenumber of format specified by <typex><type> DescriptionInteger format Type of address<name> DescriptionString Character string of the name tag, for M&M. Maximum of18 characters<vercode> DescriptionString Character string <0..9,#,*>. Maximum of 20 characters<send order> Description1Verification code first (default)2phone number to call first
15. PHONEBOOK233LZT 123 7263 R1A15.5 AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete GroupThis command deletes the group at position <gindex> from thehierarchical phone book.15.6 AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group ItemThe command deletes the item with <index> in the group with<gindex>.Description Command Possible ResponsesDeletes a groupdefined in thehierarchical phonebookAT*ESDG=<gindex> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OKShow if the commandis supportedand list thepossible <gindex>AT*ESDG=? •*ESDG:listof<gindex>s•OK<gindex> Description1-10 The group indexDescription Command Possible ResponsesDeletes the item ingroup <gindex> withposition <index>AT*ESDI=<gindex>,<index> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*ESDI=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<gindex> Description1-10 The groups index within the hierarchical phone book<index> Description1-15 The items index within the group
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL234 LZT 123 7263 R1A15.7 AT*ESGR Ericsson Group ReadThis command lists the groups in the hierarchical phone book.15.8 AT*ESIL Ericsson Silence CommandThis command orders the phone to be in silent mode. When the phoneis in silent mode, all sounds from the MS are prevented. An icon willshow the user that silent mode is active.Description Command Possible ResponsesLists thegroupsdefinedin the hierarchicalphone bookAT*ESGR •*ESGR:<gindex1>,<name1>[<CR><LF><gindex2>,<name2>..]•OK•ERRORShows if the commandis supported AT*ESGR=? OK<gindex> Description1-10 The group index<name> DescriptionString The group nameDescription Command Possible ResponsesSets the MS to silentmode AT*ESIL=[<mode>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*ESIL? •*ESIL:<mode>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupportedand listthepossible settingsAT*ESIL=? •*ESIL:(listofsupported<mode>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Silent mode off. Default setting1Silent mode on
15. PHONEBOOK235LZT 123 7263 R1A15.9 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings NumberThis command sets a <type> number, in the format <number type>, inthe MS.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets a number in theMS AT*ESNU=<type>,<number>[,<number type>]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported and showpossible settingsAT*ESNU=? •*ESNU:(listofsupported <type>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*ESNU? •*ESNU:<type1>,<number1>,<number type1><CR><LF>….*ESNU: <typen>,<numbern>,<number type n>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<type> Description0Voice L11Voice L22Fax3Data<numbertype> Description129 Default setting when dialling string does not include theinternational access code character ‘+’145 Default setting when dialling string includes theinternational access code character ‘+’<number> Description0-9, + Number
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL236 LZT 123 7263 R1A15.10 AT+CPBF Phonebook FindReturns phone book entries whose alphanumeric field starts with<findtext>.15.11 AT+CPBR Phonebook ReadReturns phone book entries in location number range <index1>...<index2> from the current phone book memory storage selected with+CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned.Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone numberstored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associatedwith the number.Description Syntax Possible ResponsesShows the currentsetting +CPBF=<findtext> •+CPBF:<index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>[[...]<CR><LF>+CBPF:<index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>]•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupported+CPBF=? • +CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<findtext > Descriptionstring type Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set asspecified by the select TE character set command, +CSCSDescription Command Possible ResponsesRead phonebook entries +CPBR=<index1>[,<index2>] • +CPBR:<index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>[[,<text_date>,<text_time>]<CR><LF>+CPBR:<index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>[,<text_date>,<text_time>]]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORTest if thecommand issupported+CPBR=? • +CPBR: (list of supported<index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERROR<indexn> Descriptioninteger type Values in the range of location numbers of phone bookmemory
15. PHONEBOOK237LZT 123 7263 R1A<number> Descriptionstring type Phone number of format <type><type> Description129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/internationalunknown145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 [4] section 10.5.4.7<text> Descriptionstring type Field of maximum length <tlength>;character set as specified by the select TE character setcommand, +CSCS.<nlength> Descriptioninteger type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number><tlength > Descriptioninteger type Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL238 LZT 123 7263 R1A15.12 AT+CPBS Phone StorageSelects phone book memory storage <storage>, which is used by otherphone book commands.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet phone bookstorage AT+CPBS=<storage> • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+CPBS? • +CPBS: <storage>[,<used>,<total>]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CPBS=? •+CPBS:(listofsupported<storage>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<storage> Description“FD” SIM fix-dialing-phone book“LD” SIM Last-dialing-phone book. Not supported“ME” ME phone book“MT” Combined ME and SIM phone books. Not supported“SM” SIM phone book“TA” TA phone book. Not supported“DC” ME dialed calls list (30 entries)“RC” ME received calls list (30 entries)“MC” ME missed calls list (30 entries)“MV” ME Voice Activated Dialing list. Not supported“SG” SMS group list, Ericsson specific. Not supported“CA” Callers allowed, Ericsson specific. Not supported“EN” SIM emergency number (+CPBW is not applicable for thisstorage)“BC” Own business card. Not supported“HP” Hierarchical phone book. Not supported<passwd> DescriptionString Represents the password required when selectingpassword protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for “FD”
15. PHONEBOOK239LZT 123 7263 R1A15.13 AT+CPBW Phonebook WriteWrites phone book entry in location number <index> in the currentphone book memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the<number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If<index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to thefirst free location in the phone book.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest phone bookwrite AT+CPBW=[<index>][,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CPBW=? •+CPBW:(listofsupported<index>s),<nlength>,(list of supported<type>s),<tlength>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<index> Descriptioninteger type Values in the range of location numbers of phone bookmemory<number> Descriptionstring type Phone number of format <type><type > Descriptioninteger format Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing stringincludes international access code character "+",otherwise 129. (refer to GSM 04.08 [4] subclause 10.5.4.7)129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/internationalunknown. Default if no “+” in sca.145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.Default if “+” in sca.161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number128-255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7<text > Descriptionstring type Field of maximum length <tlength>;character set as specified by the select TE character setcommand, +CSCS<nlength> Descriptioninteger type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL240 LZT 123 7263 R1A<tlength > Descriptioninteger type Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
241LZT 123 7263 R1A16. Short Message Services - Point to Point16.1 AT+CPIN PIN ControlSee 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control16.2 AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert SoundSee 4.15, AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound16.3 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS MessagesSee 6.10, AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages16.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre AddressCommon for both PDU and Text ModesUpdates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs aretransmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) andwrite (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by thesame commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address codedinto <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a “+” in front of the numberin <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a numberstarting with “+” will always be treated as an international number.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet service centreaddress AT+CSCA=<sca>[,<tosca>] •OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting AT+CSCA? •+CSCA:<sca>,<tosca>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CSCA=? •OK•ERROR<sca> Descriptionstring type GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address Address-Valuefield in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM defaultalphabet characters) are converted to characters of thecurrently selected TE character set
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL242 LZT 123 7263 R1A16.5 AT+CMGF Message FormatCommon for both PDU and Text ModesThis command tells the TA, which input and output format to use formessages. <mode> indicates the format of messages used with send,list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result codes resultingfrom received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode (entire TP dataunits used) or text mode (headers and body of the messages given asseparate parameters).Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.<tosca> Descriptioninteger type GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address type-of-addressoctet in integer format129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/internationalunknown. Default if no “+” in sca.145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.Default if “+” in sca.161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number128-255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7Description Command Possible ResponsesSet message format AT+CMGF=<mode> •OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+CMGF? •+CMGF:<mode>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMGF=? •+CMGF:(listofsupported<mode>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0PDU mode1Text mode
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT243LZT 123 7263 R1A16.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to MemoryPDU ModeStores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message statuswill be set to 'stored unsent', but parameter <stat> allows other statusvalues to be given. ME/TA manufacturer may choose to use differentdefault <stat> values for different message types. Entering PDU is thesame as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writingfails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.Description Command Possible ResponsesWrite message tomemory AT+CMGW=<length>[,<stat>]<CR>PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC>•+CMGW:<index>• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMGW=? •OK•ERROR<stat> Description0Received unread message (i.e. new message). Notsupported1Received read message. Not supported2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)3Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs). Notsupported16 Template message. Not supported<index> DescriptionInteger type Value in the range of location numbers supported by theassociated memory<length> DescriptionInteger type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length ofthe actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSCaddress octets are not counted in the length)<pdu> Description... InthecaseofSMS:GSM04.11SCaddressfollowedbyGSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA convertseach octet of TP data unit into two IRA character longhexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 ispresented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL244 LZT 123 7263 R1AText ModeStores message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memorystorage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message isreturned. By default message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’, butparameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given. Theentering of text is done as specified in the send message command,+CMGS. If writing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> isreturned.Note! SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be stored intext mode.Description Command Possible ResponsesWrite message tomemory AT+CMGW [=<oa/da>[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]]<CR>Text is entered <ctrl-Z/ESC>•+CMGW:<index>• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMGW=? •OK•ERROR<stat> Description0Received unread message (new message). Notsupported1Received read message. Not supported2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)3Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs). Notsupported<oa> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter (refer command +CSCS). Type of address givenby <tooa><da> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter (refer command +CSCS). Type of address givenby <toda><tooa> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (default refer <toda>)
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT245LZT 123 7263 R1A16.7 AT+CMGS Send MessagePDU ModeSends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Messagereference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful messagedelivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there isnetwork support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identifymessage upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sendingfails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:<err> is returned. This command is abortable.• <length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layerdata unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded).• The TA shall send a four character sequence<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) aftercommand line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be givenfrom TE to ME/TA.• The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given.• The echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled byV.25ter echo command E.• The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for<pdu>) and given in one line; ME/TA converts this coding into theactual octets of PDU.• When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>)equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service CentreAddress +CSCA is used.• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).<toda> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)default is 145, otherwise default is 129<index> DescriptionInteger type Value in the range of location numbers supported by theassociated memoryDescription Command Possible ResponsesSend message AT+CMGS=<length><CR>PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC>•+CMGS:<mr>[,<ackpdu>]• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMGS=? •OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL246 LZT 123 7263 R1A• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU.Text ModeSends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Messagereference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful messagedelivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there isnetwork support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identifymessage upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sendingfails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:<err> is returned. This command is abortable.• The entered text (GSM 03.40 TP-Data-Unit) is sent to address <da>and all current settings (refer Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP andService Centre Address +CSCA) are used to construct the actualPDU in the ME/TA.• The TA shall send a four character sequence<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after thecommand line is terminated with <CR>; after that text can beentered from the TE to the ME/TA.• The DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered.• The echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled byV.25ter echo command E.<mr> DescriptionInteger type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format<length> DescriptionInteger type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length ofthe actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSCaddress octets are not counted in the length)<ackpdu> Description... GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format issame as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11SC address field and parameter shall be bounded bydouble quote characters like a normal string typeparameterDescription Command Possible ResponsesSend message AT+CMGS=<da>[,<toda>] <CR>Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>•+CMGS:<mr>[,<scts>]• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMGS=? •OK•ERROR
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT247LZT 123 7263 R1A• The entered text should be formatted as follows:if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 defaultalphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command SelectTE Character Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts theentered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of AnnexA; backspace can be used to delete last character andcarriage returns can be used (previously mentioned fourcharacter sequence shall be sent to the TE after everycarriage return entered by the user);if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consistof two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers whichME/TA converts to 7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g.17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to character P (GSM23));if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is usedor <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should consist of two IRAcharacter long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will beconverted to an octet with integer value 42).• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of themessage body.<da> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter(refercommand+CSCS).Typeofaddressgivenby <toda><toda> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)default is 145, otherwise default is 129<mr> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-stringformat (refer <dt>)<mr> DescriptionInteger GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL248 LZT 123 7263 R1A16.8 AT+CMSS Send From StoragePDU modeSends message with location value <index> from message storage<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful messagedelivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code+CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable.Text ModeSends message with location value <index> from message storage<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful messagedelivery. Optionally, when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and networksupports, <scts> is returned. If sending fails in a network or an MEerror, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Thiscommand is abortable.Description Command Possible ResponsesSend from storage AT+CMSS=<index> •+CMSS:<mr>• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMSS=? •OK•ERROR<index> DescriptionInteger type Valueintherangeoflocationnumberssupportedbytheassociated memory<mr> DescriptionInteger type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer formatDescription Command Possible ResponsesSend from storage AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da> [,<toda>]] • +CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CMSS=? •OK•ERROR<index> DescriptionInteger type Valueintherangeoflocationnumberssupportedbytheassociated memory
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT249LZT 123 7263 R1A16.9 AT+CMGC Send CommandPDU ModeSends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-COMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send messagecommand, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to theTE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS<service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned.Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery statusreport result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, finalresult code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command isabortable.<da> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter(refercommand+CSCS).Typeofaddressgivenby <toda><toda> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)default is 145, otherwise default is 129<scts> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-stringformat (refer <dt>)<mr> DescriptionInteger type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer formatDescription Command Possible ResponsesSend commandmessage AT+CMGC=<length><CR><pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC> •ifPDUmode(+CMGF=0) andsending successful:+CMGC:<mr>[,<ackpdu>]•ifsendingfails:+CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CMGC=? •OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL250 LZT 123 7263 R1AText ModeSends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-COMMAND). The entering of text is as specified in the send messagecommand, +CMGS, but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRAcharacter long hexadecimal numbers, which the ME/TA converts into8-bit octets (refer to +CMGS). Message reference value <mr> isreturned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <scts> isreturned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited<length> DescriptionInteger type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length ofthe actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSCaddress octets are not counted in the length)<pdu> DescriptionString InthecaseofSMS:GSM04.11SCaddressfollowedbyGSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA convertseach octet of TP data unit into two IRA character longhexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 ispresented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format<mr> DescriptionInteger type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format<ackpdu> DescriptionString GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format issame as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11SC address field and parameter shall be bounded bydouble quote characters like a normal string typeparameterDescription Command Possible ResponsesSend commandmessage AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]<CR>Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>•ifPDUmode(+CMGF=1) andsending successful:+CMGC:<mr>[,<scts>]•ifsendingfails:+CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommands issupportedAT+CMGC=? •OK•ERROR
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT251LZT 123 7263 R1Adelivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an MEerror, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Thiscommand is abortable.<fo> Description0First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format1First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format2First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format3First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format<ct> DescriptionInteger GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type (default 0)<pid> Description0-255 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value = 0.According to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9<mn> DescriptionInteger GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number<da> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter(refercommand+CSCS). Type of address givenby <toda><toda> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)default is 145, otherwise default is 129<mr> DescriptionInteger type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format<scts> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-stringformat (refer <dt>)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL252 LZT 123 7263 R1A16.10 AT+CPMS Preferred Message StorageCommon for both PDU and Text ModesSelects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used forreading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME(but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err>shall be returned.Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet preferredmessage storage AT+CPMS=<mem1>[,<mem2>][,<mem3>]•+CPMS:<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORRead the command AT+CPMS? •+CPMS:<mem1>,<used1>,<total1,<mem2>,<used2>,<total2,<mem3>,<used3>,<total3>• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CPMS=? • +CPMS: (list of supported<mem1>s),(list ofsupported <mem2>s),(listof supported <mem3>s)•OK•ERROR<mem1> Descriptionstring type Memory from which messages are read and deleted(commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message+CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD)“ME” ME message storage“SM” SIM message storage<mem2> Descriptionstring type Memory to which writing and sending operations aremade (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSSand Write Message to Memory +CMGW)“ME” ME message storage“SM” SIM message storage
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT253LZT 123 7263 R1A16.11 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TEPDU ModeSelects the procedure for the way in which new messages received fromthe network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signalis ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving iscarried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).<mem3> Descriptionstring type Memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored(unless forwarded directly to TE). Received CBMs arealways stored in “BM” (or some manufacturer specificstorage) unless directly forwarded to TE“ME” ME message storage“SM” SIM message storage<used1>,<used2>,<used3> Descriptioninteger type Total number of messages currently in<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively<total1>,<total2> ,<total3> Descriptioninteger type Total number of message locations in<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectivelyDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet new messageindication to TE AT+CNMI=[<mode>[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,<bfr>]]]]]• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShows the currentsetting AT+CNMI? •+CNMI:<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CNMI=? •+CNMI:(list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <mt>s),(list of supported <bm>s),(list of supported <ds>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL254 LZT 123 7263 R1AIf the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment ornetwork, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.<mode> Description3Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TElink specific inband technique used to embed resultcodes and data when TA is in on-line data mode<mt> Description0No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> aspreferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in theSIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an errormessage accordingly to GSM 03.381SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of thememory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited resultcode:+CMTI: <mem>,<index>2Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routeddirectlytotheTEusingtheunsolicitedresultcodebutnotstored in ME/TA:+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU modeenabled)Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as definedin <mt>=13Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE usingunsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>.Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages ofother data coding schemes result in indication as definedin <mt>=1<bm> Description0Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specificmemory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE2New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicitedresult code:+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled).New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory<ds> Description0No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA1SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicitedresultcode:+CDS:<length><CR><LF><pdu>(PDUmode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA2SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicitedresultcode:+CDSI:<mem><index>(PDUmodeenabled).SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT255LZT 123 7263 R1AUnsolicited Result codes:+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>+CMTI: <mem>,<index>+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>+CDSI: <mem><index>Text ModeSelects the procedure for the way in which new messages received fromthe network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signalis ON. If TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving iscarried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment ornetwork, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.<bfr> Description0TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within thiscommand is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1..2 isentered (OK response shall be given before flushing thecodes). Not supportedDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet new messageindication to TE AT+CNMI=[<mode>[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>[,<bfr>]]]]]• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShows the currentsetting AT+CNMI? •+CNMI:<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CNMI=? •+CNMI:(list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <mt>s),(list of supported <bm>s),(list of supported <ds>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description3Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TElink specific inband technique used to embed resultcodes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL256 LZT 123 7263 R1A<mt> Description0No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> aspreferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in theSIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an errormessage accordingly to GSM 03.381SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of thememory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited resultcode:+CMTI: <mem>,<index>2Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routeddirectlytotheTEusingtheunsolicitedresultcode:+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [ ,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text modeenabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the showtext mode command, +CSDH3Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE usingunsolicited result codes +CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). About parameters initalics, refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH.Messages of other data coding schemes result inindication as defined in <mt>=1<bm> Description0Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specificmemory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE2New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicitedresult code:+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>(Text mode enabled)<ds> Description0No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE1SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicitedresult code: : +CDS:<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text modeenabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA2SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicitedresult code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (Text mode enabled).SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA<bfr> Description0TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within thiscommand is flushed to the TE when <mode> 1...2 isentered (OK response shall be given before flushing thecodes). Not supported
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT257LZT 123 7263 R1AUnsolicited Result codes:+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). Refer to the show text mode command,+CSDH for information on the parameters in italics.+CMTI: <mem>,<index>+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>+CDSI: <mem><index>16.12 AT+CMGR Read MessagePDU ModeReturns message with location value <index> from preferred messagestorage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire messagedata unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is ‘receivedunread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If reading fails,final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.Description Command Possible ResponsesReadmessage AT+CMGR=<index> •+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>]<CR><LF><pdu>•+CMSERROR:<err>•OK• ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CMGR=? •OK• ERROR<stat> Description0Received unread message (i.e. new message)1Received read message2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)3Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)16 Template message. Not supported<index> DescriptionInteger type Value in the range of location numbers supported by theassociated memory<alpha> DescriptionString type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but notomitted
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL258 LZT 123 7263 R1AText ModeReturns messages with location index <index> from message storage<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refercommand Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH), If the status of themessage is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘receivedread’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.<length> DescriptionInteger type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length ofthe actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSCaddress octets are not counted in the length)<pdu> DescriptionInthecaseofSMS:GSM04.11SCaddressfollowedbyGSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA convertseach octet of TP data unit into two IRA character longhexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 ispresented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal formatDescription Command Possible ResponsesReadmessage AT+CMGR=<index> •if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and SMS-DELIVER:+CMGR:<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>,[<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>•if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and SMS-SUBMIT:+CMGR:<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>],[<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>•if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:+CMGR:<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>•if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and SMS-COMMAND:+CMGR:<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],[<toda>],<length><CR><LF><cdata>]•if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and CBM storage:+CMGR:<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>•+CMSERROR:<err>•OK• ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CMGR=? •OK• ERROR<index> DescriptionInteger type Valueintherangeoflocationnumberssupportedby<mem1>
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT259LZT 123 7263 R1A<stat> Description0Received unread message (new message)1Received read message2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)3Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)4All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command). Notsupported<oa> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter(refercommand+CSCS).Typeofaddressgivenby <tooa><da> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter(refercommand+CSCS).Typeofaddressgivenby <toda><toda> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)default is 145, otherwise default is 129<tooa> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (default refer <toda>)<tora> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet inintegerformat(defaultrefer<toda>)<alpha> DescriptionString type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but notomitted, i.e. commas shall mark the place were it shouldbe. Used character set should be the one selected withcommand Select TE Character Set +CSCS<scts> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-stringformat (refer <dt>)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL260 LZT 123 7263 R1A<length> DescriptionInteger type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length ofthe actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSCaddress octets are not counted in the length)<data>The entered text should be formatted as follows:if<dcs>(setwith+CSMP)indicatesthatGSM03.38defaultalphabetisusedand<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabetaccording to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete lastcharacter and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned fourcharacter sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage returnentered by the user);if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRAcharacter long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bitcharacters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted tocharacter P (GSM 23));if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicatesthat GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text shouldconsist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA convertsinto 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to anoctet with integer value 42);sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body<fo> Description0First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format1First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format2First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format3First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format<mr> DescriptionInteger GSM 03.40 TP-Message_Reference<ra> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSMdefault alphabet) are converted to characters of thecurrently selected TE character set (refef command+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT261LZT 123 7263 R1A<dt> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz where characters indicate year, month,day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone<st> DescriptionInteger GSM 03.40 TP-status<ct> DescriptionInteger GSM 03.40 TP--command-type (default 0)<sn> DescriptionInteger GSM 03.41 CBM serial number<mid> DescriptionString type All different possible combinations of CBM messageidentifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);e.g. “0,1,5-7”<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM message identifier in integer format<page> DescriptionInteger format GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 4-7 in integer format<pages> DescriptionInteger type GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 0-3 in integer format<pid> Description0 - 255 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value = 0,according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9<dcs> Description0 - 255 Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.48. UCS2 andcompressed text not supported<sca> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in stringformat; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabetcharacters) are converted to characters of the currentlyselected TE character set
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL262 LZT 123 7263 R1A<tosca> DescriptionInteger type GSM 04.11 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integerformat129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/internationalunknown. Default if no “+” in sca145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.Default if “+” in sca161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7<vp> Description0 - 143 (TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e. 5 minute intervals up to 12 hous)144 - 167 12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)168 - 196 (TP-VP-166) x 1 day197 - 255 (TP-VP-192) x 1 week<mn> DescriptionInteger type GSM 03.40 TP-message-number
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT263LZT 123 7263 R1A16.13 AT+CMGL List MessagePDU ModeNote! Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred messagestorage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. Ifstatus of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changesto ‘received read’. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR:<err> is returned.Description Command Possible ResponsesList message AT+CMGL[=<stat>] •+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>[…]]• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CMGL=? • +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)•OK•ERROR<stat> Description0Received unread message (i.e. new message)1Received read message2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)3Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)4All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)16 Template message. Not supported<index> DescriptionInteger type Value in the range of location numbers supported by theassociated memory<alpha> DescriptionString type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but notomitted<length> DescriptionInteger type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length ofthe actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSCaddress octets are not counted in the length)
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL264 LZT 123 7263 R1AText ModeReturns messages with status value <stat> from message storage<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refercommand Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH). If the status, of themessage is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘receivedread’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.<pdu> DescriptionInthecaseofSMS:GSM04.11SCaddressfollowedbyGSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA convertseach octet of TP data unit into two IRA character longhexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 ispresented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal formatDescription Command Possible ResponsesList message AT+CMGL[=<stat>] •if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and SMS-SUBMITs and/orSMS-DELIVERs:+CMGL: <index1>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>+CMGL: <index2>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>[…]]•if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs:+CMGL:<index1>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index2>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[…]]•if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and SMS-COMMANDs:+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[<CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[…]]•if text mode (+CMGF=1), commandsuccessful and CBM storage:+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,<pages>,<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>+CMGL:+CMGL:<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>[…]]•otherwise:+CMS ERROR: <err>•OK• ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CMGL=? • +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)•OK• ERROR<index> DescriptionInteger type Valueintherangeoflocationnumberssupportedby<mem1>
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT265LZT 123 7263 R1A<stat> DescriptionInteger Indicates the status of messages in memory0Received unread message (new message)1Received read message2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)3Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)4All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)<oa> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter(refercommand+CSCS).Typeofaddressgivenby <tooa><da> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) areconverted to characters of the currently selected TEcharacter(refercommand+CSCS).Typeofaddressgivenby <toda><toda> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)default is 145, otherwise default is 129<tooa> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octetin integer format (default refer <toda>)<tora> DescriptionString type GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet inintegerformat(defaultrefer<toda>)<alpha> DescriptionString type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but notomitted i.e.commas shall mark the place were it should be. Usedcharacter set should be the one selected with commandSelect TE Character Set +CSCS
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL266 LZT 123 7263 R1A16.14 AT+CMGD Delete MessageCommon for both PDU and Text modesDeletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location<index>. If <delflag> is present and not set to 0 then the ME will ignore<index> and follow the rules for <delflag> shown below. If deletingfails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. Test commandshows the valid memory locations and optionally the supported valuesof <delflag>.<scts> DescriptionString type GSM 03.40 TP-service-centre-time-stamp in time-stringformat (refer <dt>)<length> DescriptionInteger type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length ofthe actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSCaddress octets are not counted in the length)Description Command Possible ResponsesDelete message AT+CMGD=<index>[,<delflag>] • +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CMGD=? •OK•ERROR<index> DescriptionInteger type Indicates multiple messages delation request as follows0Delete the message specified in <index>1Delete all read messages from preferred messagestorage, leaving unread messages and stored mobileoriginated messages (whether sent or not) untouched2Delete all read messages from preferred message storageandsentmobileoriginatedmessages,leavingunreadmessages and unsent mobile originated messagesuntouched3Delete all read messages from preferred messagestorage, sent and unsent mobile originated messagesleaving unread messages untouched4Delete all messages from preferred message storageincluding unread messages<index> DescriptionInteger type Valueintherangeoflocationnumberssupportedbytheassociated memory
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT267LZT 123 7263 R1A16.15 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode ParametersOnly Applicable to Text ModeControls whether detailed header information is shown in text moderesult codes.16.16 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode ParametersOnly Applicable to Text ModeUsed to select values for additional parameters needed when SM issent to the network or placed in a storage when text format messagemode is selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting fromwhen the SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0… 255). The<pid> parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicatesDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet the show textmode AT+CSDH=[<show>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OKDisplay current settings AT+CSDH? •+CSDH:<show>•+CMEERROR:<err>Show if the commandis supported AT+CSDH=? • +CSDH: (list ofsupported <show>s)•OK•+CMEERROR:<err><show> Description0Do not show header values defined in commandsAT+CSCA and AT+CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>,<pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in+CMT,+CMGL,+CMGRresultcodesforSMS-DELIVERsandSMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGRresult code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>,<length> or <cdata>1Show the values in result codesDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet the text modeparameters AT+CSMP=[<fo> [,<vp>[,<pid>[,<dcs>]]]]• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERRORDisplay currentsettings AT+CSMP? • +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>• +CME ERROR: <err>Show if thecommand issupportedAT+CSMP=? • +CSMP: (List of supported <fo>s),(list of supported <vp>s), (list ofsupported <pid>s), (list ofsupported <dcs>s)• +CME ERROR: <err>•OK• ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL268 LZT 123 7263 R1Ainterworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs> deter-mines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.16.17 AT+CSCS Select Character SetThis command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used bythe TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctlybetween TE and ME character sets.When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabetis 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero.Note! How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to, or from, the TEalphabet is manufacturer specific.<fo> Description0-255 Depending on the command or result code: first octet ofGSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default 2) in integerformat<vp> Description0-143 (TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12 hous)144-167 12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)168-196 (TP-VP-166) x 1 day197-255 (TP-VP-192) x 1 week<pid> Description0-255 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value = 0.According to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9<dcs> Description0-255 Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 andcompressed text not supportedDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet command informsTA which character setis used by the TEAT+CSCS=<chset> •OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting AT+CSCS? • +CSCS: <chset>•OK•ERRORShow list of supportedcharacter sets AT+CSCS=? • +CSCS: (list ofsupported <chset>s)•OK•ERROR
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT269LZT 123 7263 R1ARead command shows current setting and test command displayconversion schemes implemented in the TA.16.18 AT*ESTL Ericsson SMS Template List EditThis command adds an SMS template, specified by the <text>parameter, to the list of SMS templates at the position specified by the<stix> parameter. If the list already contains an SMS template at theposition <stix> this template is overwritten by the template given by the<text> parameter.If the <text> parameter is omitted, the command removes the SMSTemplate from the list at the position specified by the <stix> parameter.The read command lists all entries in the SMS Template list.<chset > Description“GSM” GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1).Default setting“IRA” International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50 [3]). Note:recommended default setting by GSM 07.07. [2]“8859-n” ISO 8859 Latin n(1-6) character set"UTF8" Universal text format, 8 bits“UCS2” Unicode, 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded characterset (ISO/IEC10646)Description Command Possible ResponsesAdd or delete itemto SMS template list AT*ESTL=<stix>[,<text>] •+CMEERROR•OK•ERRORList all entries in SMStemplate list AT*ESTL? •*ESTL:<stix1>,<text1>[<CR><LF><stix2>,<text2>[…]]+CME ERROR•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT*ESTL=? • *ESTL: (list of supported<stix>s),<ntext>•OK•ERROR<stix> DescriptionInteger value Index to list of SMS templates<text> DescriptionString value SMS template text
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL270 LZT 123 7263 R1A16.19 AT+CSMS Select Message ServiceCommon for both PDU and Text ModesSelects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messagessupported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> formobile originated messages and <bm> for broadcast type messages. Ifthe chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by theTA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.<ntext> DescriptionInteger value Maximum length of the SMS template (<text>-parameter)Description Command Possible ResponsesSelect messageservice AT+CSMS=<service> •+CSMS:<mt>,<mo>,<bm>• +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow supportedmessage types alongwith the currentservice settingAT+CSMS? •+CSMS:<service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>•OK•ERRORShow list of supportedservices AT+CSMS=? •+CSMS:(listofsupported <service>s)•OK•ERROR<service > Description0GSM 03.40 and 03.41. The syntax of SMS AT commands iscompatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+features which do not require new command syntax maybe supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with newPhase 2+ data coding schemes)1GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (the syntax of SMS AT commands iscompatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2+ version; therequirement of <service> setting 1 is mentioned undercorresponding command descriptions).Notsupported2..127 Reserved<mt> Description0Mobile terminated messages not supported1Mobile terminated messages supported
16. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT271LZT 123 7263 R1A<mo> Description0Mobile originated messages not supported1Mobile originated messages supported<bm> Description0Broadcast messages not supported1Broadcast messages supported<err> Description0...127 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values128...255 GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values300 ME failure302 Operation not allowed304 Invalid PDU mode parameter310 SIM not inserted311 SIM PIN required312 PH-SIM PIN required313 SIM failure314 SIM busy315 SIM wrong316 SIM PUK required317 SIM PIN2 required318 SIM PUK2 required500 Unknown error...511 Other values in range 256...511 are reserved512... Manufacturer specific
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL272 LZT 123 7263 R1A
273LZT 123 7263 R1A17. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast17.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TESee 16.11, AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE17.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message TypeCommon for both PDU and text modesSelects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.Description Command Possible ResponsesSelect cell broadcastmessage type AT+CSCB=[<mode>[,<mids>[,<dcss>]]] • +CMS ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShows the currentsetting AT+CSCB? •+CSCB:<mode>,<mids>,<dcss>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CSCB=? •+CSCB:(listofsupported<mode>s)•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted1Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are not accepted.Not supported<mids> Descriptionstring type All different possible combinations of CBM messageidentifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);e.g. “0,1,5-7”<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integerformat<dcss> Descriptionstring type All different possible combinations of CBM data codingschemes (refer to <dcs>). Default is empty string);e.g. “0-3,5”. Not supported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL274 LZT 123 7263 R1A
275LZT 123 7263 R1A18. SIM Application Toolkit18.1 AT+CPIN PIN ControlSee 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control18.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit SettingsAllows the external application to disable/enable the presentation of theunsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands.Parameter <on_off> is used to disable/enable the presentation of anunsolicited result code *E2STK. Setting chosen is stored internally sothat it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on.If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, themessages below are not be sent to the application.The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.Description Command Possible responsesSet the presentation ofthe unsolicited resultcodes corresponding toSTKAT*E2STKS=<on_off> • +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORRead the current status ofthe presentation of theunsolicited result codesAT*E2STKS? •*E2STKS:<on_off>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*E2STKS=? •*E2STKD:listofsupported <on_off>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERROR<on_off> Description0Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codesrelated to STK (default)1Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codesrelated to STK
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL276 LZT 123 7263 R1A18.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display TextThe ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command tothe external application by means of the unsolicited result code*E2STKD.Command AT*E2STKD allows the external application to send theappropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, andbefore the timeout expires.If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERRORresponse is generated.Test command returns the list of supported <answer>.Description Command Possible responsesAnswer to thereception ofDISPLAY TEXTAT*E2STKD <answer> •+CMEERROR<err>•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT*E2STKD=? •*E2STKD:(list of supported <answer>)•+CMEERROR<err>•OK•ERROR<answer> Description0OK. Performed as required: the text was displayed andcleared as requested. It corresponds to ‘00’ Commandperformed successfully, described in the GSM standard1OK. User Terminated Session: the text was displayed asrequested and the user wants to end the proactivesession. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session terminatedby the user, described in the GSM standard2OK. User requests backwards move: the text wasdisplayed as requested and the user wants to gobackwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backwardmove in the proactive SIM session requested by the user3OK. No response from user: the text was displayed, andalthough the clear condition was “Wait for user to clear”,the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No responsefrom user4FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT277LZT 123 7263 R1A18.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get InkeyThe ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to theexternal application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG.The external application then sends AT*E2STKG with the userresponse.Answer command allows the external application to send theappropriate answer, after receiving the unsolicited result code, andbefore the timeout expires.If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERRORresponse is generated.If <answer> parameter is 4, a failure has occurred and no moreparameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicatesERROR.Description Command Possible responsesAnswer to thereception ofGET INKEYAT*E2STKG=<answer>,[<response_type>,<user_response>]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT*E2STKG=? •*E2STKG:(list of supported <answer>),(list of supported<response_type>),(list of supported<user_response>)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<user_response> DescriptionString type Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type formatbetween “”. Coding is defined in <response_type>.Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 .Otherwise it shall be 1 byte
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL278 LZT 123 7263 R1A18.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get InputThe ME shall pass the parameters within GET INPUT command to theexternal application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKI.The external application sends AT*E2STKI with the user response.Command AT*E2STKI allows the external application to send theappropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, andbefore the timeout expires.If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERRORresponse is generated.<answer> Description0OK. Performed as required: the text was displayed. Itcorresponds to ‘00’ Command performed successfully,described in the GSM standard1OK.UserTerminatedSession:thetextwasdisplayedasrequested and the user wants to end the proactivesession. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive sessionterminated by the user, described in the GSM standard2OK. User requests backward move: the text wasdisplayed as requested and the user wants to gobackwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’Backward move in the proactive SIM sessionrequested by the user3OK. No response from user: the text was displayed, andthe user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ Noresponse from user4FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed<response_type> Description0Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)1Response type shall be SMS default alphabet2Response type shall be UCS2 alphabet3Response type shall be “Yes/No” responseDescription Command Possible responsesAnswer to thereception of GETINPUTAT*E2STKI <answer>,[<response_type>,<response_length>,<user_response>]• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT*E2STKI=? • *E2STKI: (list of supported<answer>),(list of supported<response_type>),(list of supported<prompt_text_length>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERROR
18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT279LZT 123 7263 R1AIf <answer> parameter is 4, a failure has occurred and no moreparameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicatesERROR.Note! If <response_type>=2 (UCS-2), the length of <user_response> is aneven number of bytes. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message.Note! If <response_type>=3 (Yes/No), the length of <user_response> is 1byte. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message.<user_response> DescriptionString type Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type formatbetween “”. Coding is defined in <response_type><answer> Description0OK. Performed as required: the text was displayed. Itcorresponds to ‘00’ command performed succesfully,described in the GSM standard1OK.Userterminatedsession:thetextwasdisplayedasrequested and the user wants to end the proactive session. Itcorresponds to ‘10’ proactive session terminated by the user,described in the GSM standard2OK. User requests backward move: the text was displayed asrequested and the user wants to go backwards in the session.It corresponds to ‘11’ backward move in the proactive SIMsession requested by the user3OK. No response from user: the text was displayed, and theuser did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response from user4FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed<response_type> Description0Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)1Response type shall be SMS default alphabet2Response type shall be UCS2 alphabet3Response type shall be “Yes/No” response<response_length> DescriptionInteger type (0-160) Value indicating the length of response field<user_response>. It shall be an integer within therange between <min_length_response> and<max_length_response>
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL280 LZT 123 7263 R1A18.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select ItemThe ME shall pass the parameters within SELECT ITEM command tothe external application by means of the unsolicited result code*E2STKL.Command AT*E2STKL allows the external application to send theappropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, andbefore the timeout expires.If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERRORresponse is be generated.<prompt_coding> Description0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMSdefault 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined inGSM03.38withbit8setto0. Itcorrespondstodata coding scheme of 8 bit1Text is coded in packed format, using the SMSdefault 7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bitoctets, as defined in GSM 03.38. It correspondsto data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM defaultalphabet2Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet, as defined inGSM 03.38. It corresponds to data codingscheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet<prompt_text_length> DescriptionInteger type (0-210) Value indicating the maximum length of field<prompt_text><prompt_text> DescriptionString type Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>,in string type between “”. Coding is defined in<prompt_coding>Description Command Possible responsesAnswer to thereception ofSELECT ITEMAT*E2STKL=<answer>,[<user_response>] • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT*E2STKL=? • *E2STKL: (list of supported<answer>),(list of supported<user_response>)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR
18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT281LZT 123 7263 R1AIf <answer> parameter is 4, a failure has occurred and no moreparameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicatesERROR.18.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up MenuThe ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to theexternal application, so that the STK menu can be built externally, bymeans of the unsolicited result code *E2STKM.The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter<on_off> = 0.Answer command allows the external application to send theappropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, andbefore the timeout expires.<user_response> Descriptioninteger type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 29. Itidentifies the selected <item_idn> within the items list<answer> Description0OK. Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’command performed succesfully, described in the GSMstandard1OK.Userterminatedsession.Itcorrespondsto‘10’Proactive session terminated by the user, described inthe GSM standard2OK. User requests backwards move. It corresponds to‘11’ Backward move in the proactive SIM sessionrequested by the user3OK. No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ noresponse from user4FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayedDescription Command Possible responsesAnswer to thereception of SETUP MENUAT*E2STKM=<answer>,<on_off> • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT*E2STKM=? • *E2STKM: (list of supported<answer>),(list of supported<on_off>)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL282 LZT 123 7263 R1AIf Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERRORresponse shall be generated.Values follow GSM 11.14 standard. See General Result byte withinResult TLV corresponding to TERMINAL RESPONSE.According to GSM 11.14 if the ME receives the "Item dat object foritem 1" as a null data object, then <on_off> shall be set to 0.The maximum length is fixed. Notice that 227 bytes come fromsubstracting the bytes corresponding to E2STKM: x,“”<CR><LF>E2STKM: x,“x” from 255. As a result, an extra parameterdefining the maximum length is not required.With the coding defined in GSM 11.11, the first byte defines the codingscheme. As a result, an extra parameter defining the coding is notrequired.Values follow the definition of “Identifier of Item” in “Item” TLVobject, within SET-UP MENU command, as described in GSM 11.14.The maximum length is fixed. Notice that 226 bytes come fromsubtracting the occupied bytes from 255. As a result, an extra parameterdefining the maximum length is not required.<answer> Description0OK. Performed as required: it corresponds to ‘00’command performed successfully, described in the GSMstandard1OK. User Terminated Session: the command was executedas requested and the user wants to end the proactivesession. It corresponds to ‘10’ proactive session terminatedby the user, described in the GSM standard2OK. User requests backwards move: the command wasexecuted as requested and the user wants to gobackwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ backwardmove in the proactive SIM session requested by the user3OK. No response from user: the command was executed,and the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ noresponse from user4FAILED. Screen is busy5FAILED. Command beyond MEs capability. It correspondsto‘30’.Itwasnotpossibletosuccessfullyintegrateorremove the list of menu items<on_off> Description0Remove the current menu1New menu to be displayed
18. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT283LZT 123 7263 R1A18.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by meansof the AT*E2SKTN command. The ME answers with OK, or ERROR.The Do command allows the external application to select the menuitem in the item list that was created by means of the SET-UP MENUcommand.Values follow the definition of “Item Identifier” TLV object, withinENVELOPE (MENU SELECTION) command, as described in GSM11.14.18.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up CallThe ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to theexternal application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKC,so that it takes up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call.Answer command allows the external application to send theappropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, andbefore the timeout expires.Description Command Possible responsesDo the menuselection AT*E2STKN <sel_item> • +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT*E2STKN=? • *E2STKN: (list of supported<sel_item>)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK• ERROR<sel_item> Descriptioninteger type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 29. It identifiesthe selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP MENUcommandDescription Command Possible responsesAnswer to thereception of SET UPCALLAT*E2STKC=<answer> •+CMEERROR<err>•OK•ERRORTest if thecommand issupportedAT*E2STKC=? • *E2STKC: (list of supported<answer>)•+CMEERROR<err>•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL284 LZT 123 7263 R1AIf Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERRORresponse is generated.<answer> Description0OK. Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’command performed succesfully, described in the GSMstandard1OK. User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’Proactive session terminated by the user, described in theGSM standard2OK. User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’backward move in the proactive SIM session requested bythe user3OK. No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ noresponse from user4FAILED. Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed6FAILED. User rejected call set-up request. It corresponds to‘22’7FAILED. User cleared down call before connection ornetwork release. It corresponds to ‘23’
285LZT 123 7263 R1A19. Supplementary Services19.1 AT+CPIN PIN ControlSee 3.27, AT+CPIN PIN Control19.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call MeterResets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value inSIM file EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units forboth the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required toreset the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> isreturned. Refer subclause 9.2 for <err> values.Note! This command must take into account what line is chosen withAT*ELIN or via the MMIRead command returns the current value of ACM.Description Command Possible ResponsesReset the ACM(Accumulated CallMeter) value on theSIMAT+CACM=[<passwd>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow the current value AT+CACM? •+CACM:<acm>+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORTests if the command issupported AT+CACM=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<passwd> DescriptionString type SIM-PIN2<acm> DescriptionString type Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm>under +CAOC
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL286 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter MaximumSets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximumvalue in SIM file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximumnumber of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. WhenACM (refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited (see alsoGSM 02.24 [26]). SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the value. Ifsetting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet command sets theAdvice of Chargerelated accumulatedcall meter maximumvalue in SIM fileEFACMmaxAT+CAMM=[<acmmax>[,<passwd>]] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the current value AT+CAMM? •+CAMM:<acmmax>+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command ifsupported AT+CAMM=? •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<acmmax> DescriptionString type Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly codedas <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmaxfeature<passwd> DescriptionString type SIM PIN2
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES287LZT 123 7263 R1A19.4 AT+CAOC Advice of ChargeUse of Advice of Charge supplementary service command (GSM 02.24[11] and GSM 02.86 [12]) enables the subscriber to get informationabout the cost of calls. With <mode>=0, the execute command returnsthe current call meter value from the ME. The command also includesthe possibility to enable an unsolicited event reporting of the CCMinformation. The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent whenthe CCM value changes, but no more than every 10 seconds.Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is made with the samecommand.Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activatedor not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code issupported.It is recommended (although optional) that the test command return thesupported mode values.Description Command Possible ResponsesExecute command AT+CAOC[=<mode>] • [+CAOC: <ccm>]+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORRead command,shows the currentmodeAT+CAOC? •+CAOC:<mode>•OK•ERRORTest command, showsif the command issupportedAT+CAOC=? •[+CAOC:(listofsupported<mode>s]•OK•ERROR<mode> Description0Query CCM value1Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value2Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value<ccm> DescriptionString type Threebytesofthecurrentcallmetervalueinhexadecimalformat (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); value isin home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmaxvalue in the SIM
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL288 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency TableSets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit andcurrency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used toconvert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)into currency units. SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2 (depending on which SIMcard that is used) is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in anME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT.For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the ShortMessage Services section.Description Command Possible ResponsesSet command sets theparameters of Adviceof Charge relatedprice per unit andcurrency table in SIMfile EFPUCTAT+CPUC=<currency>,<ppu>[,<passwd>] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShows the currentvalues AT+CPUC? •+CPUC:<currency>,<ppu>+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShows if the commandis supported AT+CPUC=? •OK•ERROR<currency> DescriptionString Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g.SEK)<ppu> DescriptionString type price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g.“2.66”)<passwd> DescriptionString type SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES289LZT 123 7263 R1A19.6 AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert FunctionThis command enables and disables notification of divert status changeswith the unsolicited result code *EDIF.Description Command Possible ResponsesEnable and disablenotification with theunsolicited result code*EDIFAT*EDIF=<onoff> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORShow the currentsetting AT*EDIF? •*EDIF:<onoff>+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT*EDIF=? •*EDIF:(listofsupported <onoff>s)+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERROR<onoff> Description0Disable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF1Enable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL290 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.7 AT*EIPS Identity Presentation SetThis command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag ofthe Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized. The alphatag is the first name and the last name. The presentation is done by anunsolicited result code, *ELIP for Caller ID and *EOLP for Called ID.Description Command Possible ResponsesSets the alpha tag tobe displayed in the ME AT*EIPS=<ID>,<alphatag mode> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT*EIPS? • *EIPS: <ID1>,<alphatagmode1><CR><LF>*EIPS:<ID2>,<alphatagmode2><CR><LF>•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported and list thepossible settingsAT*EIPS=? • *EIPS: (list of supportedID>s),(list of supported<alphatag mode>s)•+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERROR<ID> Description1Caller ID (*ELIP)2Called ID (*EOLP)<alphatag mode> Description0Off1First name and last name displayed
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES291LZT 123 7263 R1A19.8 AT*ELIN Ericsson Line SetThis command requests the ME to set the current line to <line>.Note! The following command reads its value from the current line and is thusaffected by the use of *ELIN:AT+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter19.9 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and ConditionsThis command allows control of the call forwarding supplementaryservice according to 3GPP TS 22.082 [4]. Registration, erasure,activation, deactivation, and status query are supported. When queryingDescription Command Possible ResponsesSet the current line to<line> AT*ELIN=<line> •+CMEERROR:<err>•OK•ERRORRead the current line AT*ELIN? •*ELIN:<line>+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT*ELIN=? •*ELIN:listofsupported <line>s+CME ERROR: <err>•OK•ERROR<line> Description1L12L2Description Syntax Possible ResponsesRequestCallingforwardingnumber andconditionsAT+CCFC=<reason>,<mode>[,<number>[,<type>[,<class>[,<subaddr>[,<satype>[,<time>]]]]]]• +CME ERROR <err>•when <mode>=2 andcommand successful:+CCFC:<status>,<class1>[,<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<time>]]][<CR><LF>+CCFC:<status>,<class2>[,<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype>[,<time>]]][...]]•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CCFC=? • + CCFC: (list of supported<reason>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL292 LZT 123 7263 R1Athe status of a network service (<mode>=2) the response line for ‘notactive’ case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not activefor any <class>.<reason> Description0Unconditional1Mobile busy2No reply3Not reachable4All call forwarding (refer 3GPP TS 22.030 [19])5All conditional call forwarding (refer 3GPP TS 22.030 [19])<mode> Description0Disable1Enable2Query status3Registration4Erasure<number> Descriptionstring type String type phone number of forwarding address in formatspecified by <type><type> Descriptioninteger format Type of address octet(refer GSM 04.08 [3] section 10.5.4.7)129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/internationalunknown. Default setting if ‘+’ is not in <sca>145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.Default setting if '+' is in <sca>161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number128 - 255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 [3] section 10.5.4.7<subaddr> Descriptionstring type string type subaddress of format specified by <satype>.Not supported
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES293LZT 123 7263 R1A<satype> Descriptioninteger format Type of subaddress octet128 NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), even number of addresssignals136 NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), odd number of addresssignals160 User defined, even number of address signals168 User defined, odd number of address signals128 - 255 Other values reserved<classx> Descriptioninteger Sum of integers each representing a class of information.Default value=71Voice L12Data4Fax8Short message service16 Data circuit sync32 Data circuit async64 Dedicated packet access128 Dedicated PAD access<time> Description1..30 When no reply is enabled or queried, this gives the time inseconds to wait before a call is forwarded, default value is20. Not supported< status > Description0Not active1Active
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL294 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.10 AT+CCWA Call WaitingThis command allows control of the call waiting supplementary serviceaccording to 3GPP TS 22.083 [5]. Activation, deactivation and statusquery are supported. When querying the status of a network service(<mode> = 2) the response line for 'not active' case (<status> = 0)should be returned only if service is not active for any <class>.Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of anunsolicited result code +CCWA:<number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the TE whencall waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable when thenetwork is interrogated.The interaction of this command with other commands based on otherGSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTSstandards.Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest callwaiting AT+CCWA=[<n>[,<mode>[,<class>]]]•when<mode>=2 and commandsuccessful:+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR><LF>+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[…]]+CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow thecurrent setting AT+CCWA? • +CCWA: <n>+CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if thecommand issupportedAT+CCWA=? • +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)+CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<n> Description0Disable1Enable<mode> Description0Disable1Enable2Query status
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES295LZT 123 7263 R1A<classx> Descriptioninteger Sum of integers each representing a class of information.Default value=71Voice L12Data4Fax8Short message service16 Data circuit sync32 Data circuit async64 Dedicated packet access128 Dedicated PAD access<status > Description0Not active1Active<number > DescriptionString type String type phone number of forwarding address in formatspecified by <type><type > DescriptionInteger format Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.0810.5.4.7, [3]);<err> Description0Phone failure3Operation not allowed4Operation not supported21 Invalid index30 No network service31 Network timeout100 Unknown
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL296 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.11 AT+CHLD Call Hold and MultipartyThis command allows control of the following call related services:• a call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but theconnection is retained by the network;• multiparty conversation (conference calls);• the served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the othereither active or alerting) can connect the other parties and release theserved subscriber's own connection.Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation,and transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22.030.This is based on the GSM/UMTS supplementary services HOLD (CallHold; refer 3GPP TS 22.083 [5] clause 2), MPTY (MultiParty; refer3GPP TS 22.084 [22]) and ECT (Explicit Call Transfer; refer 3GPP TS22.091 [29]). The interaction of this command with other commandsbased on other GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in theGSM/UMTS standards.Note! Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to teleservice 11.It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a listof operations which are supported. The call number required by someoperations is denoted by “x” (e.g. +CHLD: (0,0x,1,1x,2,2x,3)).Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest call relatedsupplementaryservicesAT+CHLD=<n> • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CHLD=? •+CHLD:(listofsupported <n>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<n> Description... Integer type; equals to numbers entered before SENDbutton in GSM 02.30 [7] subclause 4.5.5.10Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy(UDUB) for a waiting call0X ReleasesaspecificcallXfromaheldmultipartycall1Releases all active calls (if any exist) and accepts theother (held or waiting) call1X Releases a specific active call X
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES297LZT 123 7263 R1A“X” is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequenceof setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen bythe served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released.New calls take the lowest available number. Where both a held and awaiting call exists, the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call(i.e. not to the held call) in conflicting situation.Note! The “directory number” case shall be handled with dial command D,and the END case with hangup command H (or +CHUP).19.12 AT+CLIP Calling Line IdentificationThis command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service CLIP(Calling Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calledsubscriber to get the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party whenreceivinga mobile terminated call. Set command enables or disables thepresentation of the CLI at the TE. It has no effect on the execution ofthe supplementary service CLIP in the network.Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers aninterrogation of the provision status of the CLIP service according3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>).Test command returns valuessupported by the TA as a compound value2Places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and acceptsthe other (held or waiting) call2X Places all active calls on hold, except call X with whichcommunication is supported3Adds a held call to the conversation4Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriberfrom bothcalls<n> DescriptionDescription Command Possible ResponsesRequest calling lineidentification AT+CLIP=<n> • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShows the currentsetting AT+CLIP? •+CLIP:<n>,<m>+CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORShow if the commandis supported AT+CLIP=? •+CLIP:(listofsupported <n>s)+CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL298 LZT 123 7263 R1ATest command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue.Note! When CLI is not available ( <CLI validity>=2), <number> shall be anempty string (“”) and <type> value willnot be significant. Nevertheless,TA may return the recommended value 128 for <type> ((TON/NPIunknown in accordance with GSM 04.08 [8] subclause 10.5.4.7). WhenCLI has been withheld by the originator, (<CLI validity>=1) and theCLIP is provisioned with the "override category" option (refer 3GPP TS22.081[3] and 3GPP TS 23.081[40]), <number> and <type> isprovided. Otherwise, TA shall return the same setting for <number>and <type> as if the CLI was not available.<n> Description0Disable1Enable<m> Description0CLIP not provisioned1CLIP provisioned2Unknown (e.g. no network)<err> Description0Phone failure3Operation not allowed4Operation not supported21 Invalid index30 No network service31 Network timeout100 Unknown
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES299LZT 123 7263 R1A19.13 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification RestrictionThis command refers to CLIR-service according to GSM 02.81 [6] thatallows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of theCLI to the called party when originating a call.Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted orallowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustmentfor all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command canrevoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a subscriber withoutprovision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act accordingGSM 02.81 [6].The setting shall be per logical channel.When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parametersetting <n> shall turn back to default, i.e. the presentation of CLI shallbe used according to the subscription of the CLIR service, <n> is 0.Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls(given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision statusof the CLIR service (given in <m>).Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue.Note! On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in subclause “ITU-TV.25ter [13] dial command”.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest calling lineidentification restriction AT+CLIR=[<n>] • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+CLIR? •+CLIR:<n>,<m>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CLIR=? •+CLIR:(listofsupported <n>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR<n> Description0Presentation indicator is used according to thesubscription of the CLIR service1CLIR invocation2CLIR suppression
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL300 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.14 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service NotificationThis command refers to supplementary service related network initiatednotifications. The set command enables/disables the presentation ofnotification result codes from TA to TE.When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received aftera mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI:<code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup resultcodes presented in this ETS or in V.25ter [13]. When several different<code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have itsown +CSSI result code.When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is receivedduring a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forwardcheck supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited resultcode +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT callsetup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command"Calling line identification presentation +CLIP") and when severaldifferent <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shallhave its own +CSSU result code.Note! The difference between <index> and <cindex> is that <index> is aposition mark while <cindex> is a unique value for each CUG. <index>is not supported.<m> Description0CLIR not provisioned1CLIR provisioned in permanent mode2Unknown (e.g. no network)3CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted4CLIR temporary mode presentation allowedDescription Command Possible ResponsesPresentation ofnotification resultcodes from TA to TEAT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]] • +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORRead the currentsetting AT+CSSN? •+CSSN:<n>,<m>• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERRORTest if the command issupported AT+CSSN=? •+CSSN:(listofsupported <n>s),(listof supported <m>s)• +CME ERROR <err>•OK•ERROR
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES301LZT 123 7263 R1ATest command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue.<n> Description0Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA1Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA<m> Description0Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA1Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA<code1> Description0Unconditional call forwarding is active1Some of the conditional call forwarding are active2Call has been forwarded3Call is waiting4This is a CUG call (also <index> present)5Outgoing calls are barred6Incoming calls are barred7CLIR suppression rejected<index> Description0…9 CUG index10 No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)<code2> Description0This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)1This is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup)2Call has been put on hold (during a voice call)3Call has been retrieved (during a voice call)4Multiparty call entered (during a voice call)5Call on hold has been released (this is not a SSnotification) (during a voice call)6Forward check SS message received (can be receivedwhenever)10 Incoming call has been forwarded
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL302 LZT 123 7263 R1A19.15 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service DataThis command allows control of the Unstructured SupplementaryService Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network andmobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used todisable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSDresponse from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD:<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancelan ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0is taken.When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a responseUSSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. Theresponse USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequentunsolicited +CUSD: result code.The interaction of this command with other commands based on otherGSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compoundvalue.Some different scenarios are shown below:• An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented tothe external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if theexternal application has enabled result code presentation.• An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to theexternal application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if theexternal application has enabled result code.• If the external application answers to the request with the commandAT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.• A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from theexternal application.Description Command Possible ResponsesRequest unstructuredsupplementary servicedataAT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>]] •+CMEERROR:<err>•OKShow supportedmessage types alongwith the current servicesettingAT+CUSD? •+CUSD:<n>•OK•ERRORShow list of supportedservices AT+CUSD=? •+CUSD:(listofsupported <n>s)•OK•ERROR
19. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES303LZT 123 7263 R1AThe different alternatives are shown below.Network Mobile Equipment External application1Signal Sends unsolicitedresult code +CUSD Result code presentationenabled, presented2Signal askingfor reply Sends unsolicitedresult code +CUSD Result code presentationenabled, presented3Answer AT+CUSD3b Sends AT+CUSD<n> Description0DisableresultcodepresentationintheTA1Enable result code presentation in the TA2Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable tothe read command response<str> Descriptionstring String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network is notinterrogated):-If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used:*if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select TECharacter Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet intocurrent TE character set according to rules ofGSM 07.05 Annex AIf TE character set is ”HEX”: ME/TA converts each 7-bitcharacter of GSM alphabet into two IRA character longhexadecimalnumber(e.g.characterP(GSM23)ispresentedas 17 (IRA 49 and 55)). Not supported- if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit data coding scheme is used: ME/TAconverts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character longhexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 ispresented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)). Notsupported
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL304 LZT 123 7263 R1A
305LZT 123 7263 R1A20. Alphabetical Listing of AT CommandsAT Command Description Page No.AT Attention Command 189AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control 197AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response 197AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration 189AT&W Store User Profile 190AT* List all Supported AT Commands 190AT*E2APR M2M Ausio Profile Manipulation 127AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description 209AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification 121AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode 211AT*E2ESC M2M M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time 207AT*E2IO Ericsson M2M Input/Output Read/Write 195AT*E2NMPR Ericsson M2M Set NMEA (GPS) Port Rate 182AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum 229AT*E2PHFB Portable Handsfree Button Sense Enable 133AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication 217AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number 221AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call 283AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text 276AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey 277AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input 278AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item 280AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu 281AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection) 283AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings 275AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request 129AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status 217AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection 130
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL306 LZT 123 7263 R1AAT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal 132AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring 100AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile 218AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function 289AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time 102AT*EENMEA NMEA (GPS) Mode on UART2 181AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set 290AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode 133AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set 291AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset 103AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode 134AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request 134AT*ENAD Ericsson Internet Account Define 185AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event 103AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network 219AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network 220AT*EPRR Ericsson Personal Ring Type Read 136AT*EPRW Ericsson Personal Ring type Write 137AT*ERIL Ericsson Ring Level Set 139AT*ERIN Ericsson Ring Set 140AT*ERIP Ericsson Ring Signal Playback Command 141AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group 229AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group 230AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number 231AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group 233AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item 233AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read 234AT*ESIL Ericsson Silence Command 234AT*ESIR Read MS System Interface Release 190AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name 222AT*ESMA Ericsson Set Message Alert Sound 142AT*ESMM Ericsson Settings Minute Minder 104AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number 235AT Command Description Page No.
20. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS307LZT 123 7263 R1AAT*ESOM Ericsson Settings Own Melody 142AT*ESTL Ericsson SMS Template List Edit 269AT*EWBA Ericsson WAP Bookmark Add 171AT*EWBR Ericsson WAP Bookmark Read 172AT*EWCG Ericsson WAP CSD Gateway 173AT*EWCT Ericsson WAP Connection Timeout 174AT*EWDT Ericsson WAP Download Timeout 174AT*EWHP Ericsson WAP Homepage 175AT*EWIL Ericsson WAP Image Load 175AT*EWLI Ericsson WAP Login 176AT*EWPA Ericsson WAP Push Access Setting 177AT*EWPB Ericsson WAP Preferred Bearer 177AT*EWPN Ericsson WAP Profile Name 178AT*EWPR Ericsson WAP Profile 179AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control 144AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter 285AT+CALA Set Alarm (Not Supported in SIR 1.0) 104AT+CALD Alarm Delete 105AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum 286AT+CAOC Advice of Charge 287AT+CAPD Postpone or Dismiss an Alarm 105AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type 147AT+CCFC Call Forwarding Number and Conditions 291AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date 106AT+CCWA Call Waiting 294AT+CEER Extended Error Report 106AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality 107AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate 151AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach 152AT+CGDATA Enter Data State 153AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context 154AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting 156AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification 191AT Command Description Page No.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL308 LZT 123 7263 R1AAT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification 191AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification 192AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address 157AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) 158AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) 160AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status 163AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages 164AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification 192AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty 296AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters 165AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters 166AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration 167AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report 169AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading 170AT+CHUP Hang Up Call 90AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification 223AT+CIND Indicator Control 108AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands 109AT+CLCK Facility Lock 223AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification 297AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction 299AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error 109AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting 110AT+CMGC Send Command 249AT+CMGD Delete Message 266AT+CMGF Message Format 242AT+CMGL List Message 263AT+CMGR Read Message 257AT+CMGS Send Message 245AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory 243AT+CMOD Call Mode 91AT+CMSS Send From Storage 248AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol 201AT Command Description Page No.
20. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS309LZT 123 7263 R1AAT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE 253AT+CNUM Subscriber Number 225AT+COPS Operator Selection 227AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status 111AT+CPBF Phonebook Find 236AT+CPBR Phonebook Read 236AT+CPBS Phone Storage 238AT+CPBW Phonebook Write 239AT+CPIN PIN Control 113AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage 252AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table 288AT+CPWD Change Password 115AT+CR Service Reporting Control 117AT+CRC Cellular Result Code 117AT+CREG Network Registration 228AT+CRES Restore Settings 203AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol 149AT+CSAS Save Settings 118AT+CSCA Service Centre Address 241AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type 273AT+CSCS Select Character Set 268AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters 267AT+CSMP SetTextModeParameters 267AT+CSMS Select Message Service 270AT+CSQ Signal Strength 118AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification 300AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update 119AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data 302AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up 92AT+GMI Read Manufacturer Identification 193AT+GMM Read Model Identification 193AT+GMR Read Revision Identification 194AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format 204AT Command Description Page No.
GM47/GM48 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL310 LZT 123 7263 R1AAT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control 205AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting 205AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command 206AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation 92AT+WS46 Mode Selection 198ATA Answer 85ATD Dial 86ATE Command Echo 198ATH Hang up 88ATI Identification Information 194ATL Monitor Speaker Loudness 88ATM Monitor Speaker Control 145ATO Return to Online Data Mode 89ATP Select Pulse Dialling 89ATQ Result Code Suppression 95ATS0 Automatic Answer Control 95ATS2 Escape Sequence Character 96ATS3 Command Line Termination Character 96ATS4 Response Formatting Character 97ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) 98ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control 98ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout 99ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control 99ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control 100ATT Select Tone Dialling 89ATV DCE Response Format 199ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control 90ATZ Reset To Default Configuration 200AT Command Description Page No.

Navigation menu